libreoffice-help-gl 1:3.5.2-2ubuntu1 / usr / share / libreoffice / help / gl / swriter.ht

13 .uno%3AClosePreview 39 To exit the page preview, click the Close Preview button.
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 3d Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TLB_TREELISTBOX 1c Select a database and table.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_INDIVIDUAL 37 Click to create one document for every one data record.
33 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_GENERATE_FROM_DATABASE 3a Generate each file name from data contained in a database.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FROM 37 Specifies which records to include in your form letter.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ALB_COLUMN 51 Uses the content of the selected data field as the file name for the form letter.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3AED_PATH 2d Specifies the path to store the form letters.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_TO 36 Specifies the number of the last record to be printed.
22 SW_LISTBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_LB_FILTER 17 Select the file format.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_MARKED 99 Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_SINGLE_DOC 3d Click to create one big document containing all data records.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ACB_SINGLE_JOBS 3f Prints each form letter individually with the selected printer.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_ALL 2c Processes all the records from the database.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_PRINTER 18 Prints the form letters.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_FROM 37 Specifies the number of the first record to be printed.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FILE 20 Saves the form letters in files.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3APB_PATH 1d Opens the Select Path dialog.
1f .uno%3ASendOutlineToStarImpress 48 Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document.
1d .uno%3ASendOutlineToClipboard 4b Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF).
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT%3ANF_PARA 74 Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading.
15 .uno%3ACreateAbstract bc Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT%3ANF_LEVEL 48 Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document.
20 .uno%3ASendAbstractToStarImpress 96 Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
11 .uno%3ANewHtmlDoc bc Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document.
22 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
27 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL bc Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document.
10 .uno%3ANavigator e4 Shows or hides the Navigator, where you can quickly jump to different parts of your document. You can also use the Navigator to insert elements from the current document or other open documents, and to organize master documents.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_HYP a3 Creates a hyperlink when you drag and drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX9 f1 Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX13 74 Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX16 52 Type the number of the page number that you want to jump to, and then press Enter.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX11 4d Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_OUTLINES 68 Click 1 to only view the top level headings in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX7 22 Shows or hides the Navigator list.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX4 b5 Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX8 5a Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX5 f3 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX24 c0 Opens the Navigation toolbar, where you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX3 a5 Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Graphics".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX12 38 Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX6 f5 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
18 SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_LISTBOX 102 Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the contents of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX14 d1 Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_COPY a6 Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX2 a9 Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Graphics".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX10 4d Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX15 d1 Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_LINK 161 Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag and drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX17 4a Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open.
1e SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA_ERROR 38 Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas.
18 SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA 32 Select this icon to browse through table formulas.
e SW_HID_NID_FRM 2f Select this icon to browse through text frames.
e SW_HID_NID_GRF 2c Select this icon to browse through graphics.
f SW_HID_NID_MARK 2d Select this icon to browse through reminders.
e SW_HID_NID_REG 2c Select this icon to browse through sections.
e SW_HID_NAVI_VS 115 Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click one of the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected.
e SW_HID_NID_DRW 33 Select this icon to browse through drawing objects.
14 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEDOWN 3b Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object.
e SW_HID_NID_TBL 2a Select this icon to browse through tables.
e SW_HID_NID_FTN 2d Select this icon to browse through footnotes.
f SW_HID_NID_PREV 3c Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type.
11 SW_HID_NID_POSTIT 2c Select this icon to browse through comments.
f SW_HID_NID_NEXT 38 Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type.
10 SW_HID_SCRL_NAVI b5 If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document.
f SW_HID_NID_OUTL 2c Select this icon to browse through headings.
e SW_HID_NID_SEL 2e Select this icon to browse through selections.
13 SW_HID_NID_SRCH_REP 32 Select this icon to browse through search results.
e SW_HID_NID_PGE 29 Select this icon to browse through pages.
f SW_HID_NID_CTRL 32 Select this icon to browse through control fields.
e SW_HID_NID_OLE 2f Select this icon to browse through OLE objects.
12 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEUP 3d Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object.
e SW_HID_NID_BKM 2d Select this icon to browse through bookmarks.
16 SW_HID_NID_INDEX_ENTRY 31 Select this icon to browse through index entries.
1b SW_HID_MD_COPY_TO_CLIPBOARD 2e Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard.
16 SW_HID_GLOS_GROUP_TREE 43 Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths.
14 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_MACRO 57 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_NET_REL 2c Links to files on the Internet are relative.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_FILE_REL 3c Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_RENAME 5f Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3AED_SHORTNAME 96 Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3AED_NAME bc Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New.
f SW_HID_BIB_BASE 2e Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories.
13 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_EDIT a0 Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close.
13 .uno%3AEditGlossary da Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_RENAME 5e Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box.
1a SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DEFINE_TEXT d5 Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_IMPORT 89 Opens a dialog where you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3ALB_PATH be Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_INSERT_TIP 123 Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3AED_NAME bb Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_SHOW_EXAMPLE 39 Turns on or off a preview of the selected AutoText entry.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_PATH 52 Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_BIB 2e Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories.
16 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_REPLACE 6e Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_NEW 50 Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DEFINE cf Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
28 sw%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_EDIT 89 Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_NS 32 Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_NN 36 Type the new name for the selected AutoText component.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_OS 32 Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_ON 38 Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item.
1d .uno%3AAuthoritiesEntryDialog 26 Edits the selected bibliography entry.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_NEXT 39 Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKNUMFORMAT b2 Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_PREV 3d Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document.
12 .uno%3AFieldDialog 75 Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command.
13 .uno%3AEditFootnote 77 Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command.
2d sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ABT_PREV 41 Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
23 sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE 77 Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command.
2d sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ABT_NEXT 3d Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
1f SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PREV_SAME 40 Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MULTMRK%3ALB_TOX 3e Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to.
1f SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEXT_SAME 3f Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document.
1c SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_DELETE 59 Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted.
17 .uno%3AIndexEntryDialog 66 Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
1a SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEXT 3f Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document.
1a SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PREV 43 Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document.
12 SW_HID_REGION_TREE 58 Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list.
2d sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_DISMISS 6a Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document.
11 .uno%3AEditRegion 3c Changes the properties of sections defined in your document.
c .uno%3ARuler 9b Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page.
11 .uno%3AViewBounds 62 Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed.
c .uno%3AMarks 76 Shows or hides field shadings in your document, including non-breaking spaces, custom hyphens, indexes, and footnotes.
11 .uno%3AFieldnames 42 Switches the field display between field names and field contents.
13 .uno%3AControlCodes 67 Shows nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
11 .uno%3ABrowseView 2f Displays the document as seen in a Web browser.
12 .uno%3APrintLayout 36 Displays how the document will look when you print it.
1b .uno%3AShowHiddenParagraphs 21 Shows or hides hidden paragraphs.
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_PAGE cc Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page.
25 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_COL ee Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column.
22 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_BREAK%3ALB_COLL 46 Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break.
2a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_BREAK%3AED_PAGENUM 4a Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break.
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_LINE 7e Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_BREAK%3ACB_PAGENUM c7 Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break.
12 .uno%3AInsertBreak 59 Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position.
14 .uno%3AInsertSection 137 Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose this command to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply custom column layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met.
2c sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_RNAME 20 Type a name for the new section.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_CONDITION 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_DDE a3 Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected.
2b sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_FILE 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_PROTECT 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
24 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_FILE 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ALB_SUBREG 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
2e sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_PROTECT 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
2c sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3APB_PASSWD 39 Opens a dialog where you can change the current password.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_FILE 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3APB_FILE 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_DDE a3 Creates a DDE link. Select this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is selected.
2b sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_HIDE 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
2a sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3APB_FILE 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
2d sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ALB_SUBREG 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_FILE 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
26 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_RANAME 20 Type a name for the new section.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_HIDE 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3APB_PASSWD 39 Opens a dialog where you can change the current password.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_PASSWD 60 Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters.
29 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_CONDITION 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_SECTION_INDENTS%3AMF_AFTER 3d Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_SECTION_INDENTS%3AMF_BEFORE 3d Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_NUMBER_AUTO 57 Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_TYPE_FTN 78 Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page.
1b .uno%3AInsertFootnoteDialog 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ABT_NUMBER_CHAR 3d Inserts a special character  as a footnote or endnote anchor.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3AED_NUMBER_CHAR 4c Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_TYPE_ENDNOTE 79 Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document.
14 .uno%3AInsertEndnote 79 Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document.
15 .uno%3AInsertFootnote 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_NUMBER_CHAR 4c Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_INSERT_BOOKMARK%3ACB_BOOKMARK c0 Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the current document. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete.
31 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_INSERT_BOOKMARK%3ABT_DELETE 8a To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow.
15 .uno%3AInsertBookmark 81 Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CAPTION%3AEDT_SEP 51 Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text.
1a .uno%3AInsertCaptionDialog 5b Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_FORMAT 41 Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_CATEGORY e6 Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_POS 62 Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABTN_AUTOCAPTION 90 Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialog box.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CAPTION%3AEDT_TEXT 3f Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number.
12 SW_HID_DLG_CAPTION 5b Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ACB_APPLYBAS 2c Engade un bordo ou sombra ao marco da lenda.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ALB_LEVEL 6f Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 21 Especifica o estilo de carácter.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3AED_SEPARATOR 5e Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABTN_OPTION c2 Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
15 .uno%3AInsertEnvelope 14 Creates an envelope.
14 SW_HID_ENVELOP_PRINT 30 Creates a new document and inserts the envelope.
15 SW_HID_ENVELOP_INSERT 3d Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ABOX_SEND 6b Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return  address.
e SW_HID_ENV_ENV 96 Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_DATABASE 48 Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_SEND 6b Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return  address.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_ADDR 1b Enter the delivery address.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_TABLE 4e Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ABTN_INSERT b0 Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_DBFIELD b0 Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SIZE_HEIGHT 21 Enter the height of the envelope.
2c sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABTN_ADDR_EDIT 59 Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_ADDR_LEFT 6f Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field.
2c sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SEND_TOP 6b Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field.
2c sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_ADDR_TOP 6e Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field.
e SW_HID_ENV_FMT 37 Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SIZE_WIDTH 20 Enter the width of the envelope.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SEND_LEFT 6c Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field.
2c sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABTN_SEND_EDIT 56 Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABOX_SIZE_FORMAT 79 Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 74 Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3AFLD_DOWN 2e Enter the amount to shift the print area down.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_BOTTOM 45 Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_RGHT 46 Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray.
e SW_HID_ENV_PRT 27 Set the print options for the envelope.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_CNTR 42 Feeds the envelope vertically from the center of the printer tray.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_TOP 43 Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_LEFT 45 Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_RGHT 48 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_LEFT 47 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3AFLD_RIGHT 36 Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_CNTR 44 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the center of the printer tray.
12 SW_HID_FIELD_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
13 SW_HID_FIELD_INSERT 77 Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button.
12 .uno%3AInsertField 2f Inserts a field at the current cursor position.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKDATEOFF 40 Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKLEVEL 50 Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKVALUE 57 Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ACB_DOKFIXEDCONTENT 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
e SW_HID_FLD_DOK 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_REF%3AED_REFNAME 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFFORMAT 48 Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFSELECTION b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFTYPE 91 Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert.
1b SW_HID_REFSELECTION_TOOLTIP b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
1b .uno%3AInsertReferenceField bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_REF%3AED_REFVALUE f Edit the value.
e SW_HID_FLD_REF bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_EDIT 4e Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_LISTNAME 27 Enter a unique name for the Input list.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTREMOVE 28 Removes the selected item from the list.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTADD 1a Adds the Item to the list.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ABT_FUNCMACRO 79 Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTUP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3ALB_LISTITEMS 48 Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_FUNCTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCCOND2 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_LISTITEM 11 Enter a new item.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCVALUE 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
f SW_HID_FLD_FUNC 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTDOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_NEXT 42 Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_FUNCFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCNAME 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_LISTITEMS 3b Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCCOND1 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ALB_DOKINFFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
11 SW_HID_FLD_DOKINF 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ACB_DOKINFFIXEDCONTENT 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ALB_DOKINFSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
16 SW_HID_FIELD_DINF_TYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARSEPARATOR 5d Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARCHAPTERLEVEL 52 Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ACB_VARINVISIBLE 29 Hides the field contents in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARNUMFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
e SW_HID_FLD_VAR 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARNAME 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
14 SW_HID_FLDVAR_DELETE 7d Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARVALUE 40 Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field.
13 SW_HID_FLDVAR_APPLY 32 Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARFORMAT 48 In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ARB_DBOWNFORMAT 31 Uses the format defined in the selected database.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ARB_DBFORMAT 47 Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DB%3AED_DBCONDITION 3a For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBNUMFORMAT 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
d SW_HID_FLD_DB 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3APB_ADDDB 82 Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list.
17 SW_HID_DB_SELECTION_TLB 54 Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DB%3AED_DBSETNUMBER 62 Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met.
15 SW_HID_PRINT_AS_MERGE d1 When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBFORMAT 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
10 SW_HID_FLD_INPUT 4f Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_INPUT%3APB_NEXT 2e Jumps to the next input field in the document.
2c sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_FLD_INPUT%3AED_EDIT b5 The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field.
1b SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_ENTRY a6 Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed.
23 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SRCH_WORDONLY 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
28 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SRCH_CASESENSITIVE 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
1b SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_LEVEL 0 
1b SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
1a SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_TYPE 33 Select the index that you want to add the entry to.
19 .uno%3AInsertIndexesEntry 3c Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
18 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_OK 22 Marks an index entry in your text.
26 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PHONETIC_READING f9 Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry.
1f SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_APPLY_ALL 8f Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_NEW_USER_IDX%3AED_NAME 70 Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables.
1d SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SEC_KEY c9 Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold".
1e SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PRIM_KEY b2 Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold".
19 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEW 53 Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index.
20 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_MAIN_ENTRY 40 Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index.
17 .uno%3AInsertMultiIndex 47 Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_STD 4d Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style.
2c sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_ASSIGN 43 Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ALB_PARALAY 74 Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_EDIT_STYLE 54 Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ALB_LEVEL 39 Select the index level that you change the formatting of.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_AREA 4f Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_TYPE 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_TOXMARKS 6a Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry in the index.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMHEADINGS 96 Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_ADDSTYLES e1 Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_READONLY 36 Prevents the contents of the index from being changed.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3AED_TITLE 25 Enter a title for the selected index.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3APB_ADDSTYLES 62 Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ANF_LEVEL 3b Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index.
14 SW_HID_TP_TOX_SELECT 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_INITIALCAPS 3d Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_USEFF 11b Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p".
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_USE_DASH d2 Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12".
2d sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3AMB_AUTOMARK 2b Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMFILE 64 Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_KEYASENTRY 2d Inserts index keys as separate index entries.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_COLLECTSAME c3 Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43".
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_SORTALG aa Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 3f Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_CASESENSITIVE 7f Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_CAPTIONSEQUENCE 47 Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ARB_FROMOBJECTNAMES 28 Creates index entries from object names.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_DISPLAYTYPE 46 Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ARB_FROMCAPTIONS 2b Creates index entries from object captions.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMGRAPHICS 1f Includes graphics in the index.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMOLE 22 Includes OLE objects in the index.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_LEVELFROMCHAPTER 78 Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMTABLES 1d Includes tables in the index.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMFRAMES 22 Includes text frames in the index.
12 SW_HID_OLE_CHECKLB 47 Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_BRACKET 42 Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_SEQUENCE 2f Automatically numbers the bibliography entries.
30 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES%3APB_RIGHT 49 Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy.
2f sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES%3APB_LEFT 47 Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy.
19 SW_HID_DLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES 35 Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles.
13 SW_HID_TP_TOX_ENTRY 9b Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Index/Table tab.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_PAGENO 25 Inserts the page number of the entry.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ALL_LEVELS 38 Applies the current settings without closing the dialog.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_TAB de Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_EDITSTYLE 3f Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_ENTRY_NO 7d Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ENTRYNO 6d Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
13 SW_HID_TOKEN_WINDOW 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
15 SW_HID_TOX_ENTRY_EDIT 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_RELTOSTYLE c1 Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_FILLCHAR 28 Select the tab leader that you want use.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 49 Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
17 SW_HID_TOX_ENTRY_BUTTON 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_AUTORIGHT 2d Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ENTRY 28 Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3AMF_TABPOS 4a Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_HYPERLINK 1aa Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_ALPHADELIM 5a Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_CHAPTERENTRY 4b Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_COMMASEPARATED 41 Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_MAIN_ENTRY_STYLE cf Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_CHAPTERINFO 8e Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ANF_LEVEL_OL 59 Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN3 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_DOCPOS 5d Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_AUTHINSERT a2 Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_AUTHFIELD 7b To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_THIRDKEY 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN1 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_AUTHREMOVE 3c Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP1 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTCONTENT 73 Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_FIRSTKEY 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP3 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP2 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_SECONDKEY 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN2 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
1d SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_INSTITUTION 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_YEAR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SERIES 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_MONTH 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1c SW_HID_DLG_CREATE_AUTH_ENTRY 2b Change the content of a bibliography entry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM3 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ANNOTE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITION 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NUMBER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM1 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_BOOKTITLE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PAGES 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SCHOOL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM2 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITOR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NOTE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM4 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_JOURNAL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM5 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1e SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_HOWPUBLISHED 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ADDRESS 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1c SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_IDENTIFIER 80 Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry.
15 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_URL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PUBLISHER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ISBN 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHOR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CHAPTER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1f SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ORGANIZATIONS 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_VOLUME 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
20 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHORITY_TYPE 2d Select the source for the bibliography entry.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_TITLE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1a SW_HID_DLG_CREATE_AUTOMARK 43 Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index.
23 SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_CREATE_ENTRY db Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database.
20 SW_HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_FROM_DOC_RB 5a Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document.
19 SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_OK b2 Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document.
1c SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
1f SW_HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_ID_LISTBOX 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
1d .uno%3AInsertAuthoritiesEntry 21 Inserts a bibliography reference.
21 SW_HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_FROM_COMP_RB 33 Inserts a reference from the bibliography database.
21 SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_EDIT_ENTRY 5f Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record.
1c SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_ENTRY 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
12 .uno%3AInsertFrame 5f Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 7d Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_ROW 34 Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 65 Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable a8 Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell.
32 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ABT_AUTOFORMAT 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 34 Prevents the table from spanning more than one page.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_COL 37 Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
37 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 3f Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_NAME 1b Enter a name for the table.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_HEADER 24 Includes a heading row in the table.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_BORDER 21 Adds a border to the table cells.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CHANGE_DB%3APB_ADDDB 77 Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list.
20 sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_CHANGE_DB 2e Lists the databases that are currently in use.
1a .uno%3AChangeDatabaseField 31 Change the data sources for the current document.
10 .uno%3AInsertDoc 33 Inserts a text file at the current cursor position.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ARB_EDIT 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3APB_URL 47 Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ABTN_NEXT 14 Jump to Next Script.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3AED_TYPE 31 Enter the type of script that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ABTN_PREV 18 Jump to Previous Script.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ARB_URL b1 Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert.
13 .uno%3AInsertScript 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
1f sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
2b sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3AED_EDIT 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3AED_URL b1 Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert.
f SW_HID_VS_RULER 8c Select the type of line that you want to insert, and then click OK. The "Plain" type inserts an empty paragraph with a line as lower border.
19 .uno%3AInsertGraphicRuler 39 Inserts a horizontal line at the current cursor position.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageHeader 92 Adds or removes a header from the page style that you select in the submenu. The header is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageFooter 92 Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_ORPHANS 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_BREAKPOSITION 2a Select where you want to insert the break.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_PAGENUM 8b Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0".
3f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_HYPHENAFTER 66 Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_PAGECOLL 6e Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_KEEPTOGETHER 6a Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_WIDOWS 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
40 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_HYPHENBEFORE 63 Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_ORPHANS 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_MAXHYPH 45 Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_KEEPTOGETHER 51 Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_BREAKTYPE 2e Select the break type that you want to insert.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_PAGEBREAK 4b Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_PAGECOLL 46 Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_EXT 2b Specify hyphenation and pagination options.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_HYPHEN 43 Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_WIDOWS 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_DISTANCE 63 Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_LINES 98 Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps.
f SW_HID_DROPCAPS b1 Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ABOX_TEMPLATE 44 Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_DROPCAPS 37 Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AEDT_TEXT 63 Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ACB_WORD 80 Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ACB_SWITCH 38 Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_NEW_START 3a Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NUMBER_NEW_START 5a Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
26 SW_LISTBOX_TP_NUMPARA_LB_OUTLINE_LEVEL 54 Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style.
34 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_RESTART_PARACOUNT 56 Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter.
2d sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_COUNT_PARA 35 Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_RESTART_PARA 37 Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering
2c sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NEW_START 30 Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ALB_NUMBER_STYLE 43 Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph.
e SW_HID_NUMPARA a7 Adds or removes outline level, numbering, or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list.
11 .uno%3APageDialog 8e Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background.
17 .uno%3APageColumnDialog 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
25 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_COLUMN%3ABTN_UP 31 Moves the column display one column to the right.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_HEIGHT 58 Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area.
14 .uno%3AFormatColumns 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
13 SW_HID_TABLE_COLUMN 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ACB_BALANCECOLS 93 Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ACB_AUTO_WIDTH 1f Creates columns of equal width.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_1 1e Enter the width of the column.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_COLUMN%3ALB_APPLY_TO 3c Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to.
27 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_COLUMN%3ABTN_DOWN 30 Moves the column display one column to the left.
16 SW_HID_COLUMN_VALUESET 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_2 1e Enter the width of the column.
27 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_DIST1 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_NUMBER 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_3 1e Enter the width of the column.
d SW_HID_COLUMN 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_POSITION 81 Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_STYLE 6e Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None".
27 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_DIST2 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINEPOS 61 Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_DIST 72 Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEDIST 66 Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINETYPE 69 Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt".
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_MAXHEIGHT 2f Enter the maximum height for the footnote area.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT 57 Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height.
14 SW_HID_FOOTNOTE_PAGE 7a Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEWIDTH 4e Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT_PAGE 5b Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_AT_TXTEND aa Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ALB_END_NUMVIEW 2c Select the numbering style for the endnotes.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_END_PREFIX 46 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number
3b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AFLD_FTN_OFFSET 36 Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ALB_FTN_NUMVIEW 2d Select the numbering style for the footnotes.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_NUM_FMT 31 Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_AT_TXTEND 28 Adds endnotes at the end of the section.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_END_SUFFIX 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number.
3b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AFLD_END_OFFSET 35 Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_FTN_SUFFIX 42 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_NUM 3f Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_NUM_FMT 32 Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_FTN_PREFIX 48 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_NUM 3e Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3AMF_TEXTSIZE 54 Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_NOGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_PRINT 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3AMF_RUBYSIZE 26 Enter the font size for the Ruby text.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_DISPLAY 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ALB_COLOR 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_CHARSGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ANF_CHARSPERLINE 3f Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ANF_LINESPERPAGE 3a Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_LINESGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_RUBYBELOW 39 Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text.
14 .uno%3AGraphicDialog 49 Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected graphic.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_WIDTH 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_FOLLOW b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ADLB_VERTICAL 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_AUTOHEIGHT a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_ASCHAR 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_FOLLOWTEXTFLOW b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOCHAR 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_FIXEDRATIO 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_AUTOWIDTH a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_AS_CHAR 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_REL_HEIGHT 61 Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ADLB_HORIZONTAL 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_HORITO 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOPAGE 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_PARA 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
e SW_HID_FRM_STD 4e Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_VERTTO 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_REL_WIDTH 5f Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_AT_CHAR 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_VERT 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_KEEPRATIO 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_MIRROR 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_AT_VERT_POS 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ALB_VERT_RELATION 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_PAGE 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOPARA 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_HORI 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ALB_HORI_RELATION 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_WIDTH 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ABT_REALSIZE 47 Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_VERTBY 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_HORIMIRROR 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_HORIBY 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_AT_HORZ_POS 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_RIGHT 44 Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space.
e .uno%3AWrapOff 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_ANCHOR_ONLY 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_ONLYOUTSIDE 60 Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape.
35 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_THROUGH 27 Places the object in front of the text.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_IDEAL ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
f .uno%3AWrapMenu 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN 5a Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_OUTLINE 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
36 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_PARALLEL 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
1d .uno%3AWrapThroughTransparent 71 Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
d .uno%3AWrapOn 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
f .uno%3ATextWrap 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
12 .uno%3AWrapThrough 27 Places the object in front of the text.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 58 Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN 59 Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_TRANSPARENT 71 Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5b Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text.
12 .uno%3AWrapContour 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
15 .uno%3AWrapAnchorOnly 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
30 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_NO_WRAP 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
32 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_LEFT 43 Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space.
e SW_HID_FRM_EXT 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
10 .uno%3AWrapIdeal ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_SELECT 3e Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLY 184 Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click.
17 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_PIPETTE c1 Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box.
15 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_APPLY 2b Applies the contour to the selected object.
19 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_WORKPLACE 4b Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_UNDO 19 Reverses the last action.
29 svx%3AFloatingWindow%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
14 .uno%3AContourDialog 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_CIRCLE 3b Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYEDIT 5f Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_GRAPHWND 22 Displays a preview of the contour.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYMOVE 4c Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYINSERT 79 Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYDELETE 67 Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_RECT 73 Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR%3AMTF_TOLERANCE 97 Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage.
1b SVX_HID_CONTDLG_AUTOCONTOUR 42 Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_REDO 2d Reverses the action of the last Undo command.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_RIGHT_PAGES 3a Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages.
24 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ACB_VERT 26 Flips the selected graphic vertically.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_LEFT_PAGES 3b Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on even pages.
15 .uno%3AFlipHorizontal 26 Flips the selected graphic vertically.
e SW_HID_GRF_EXT 3f Specify the flip and the link options for the selected graphic.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3APB_BROWSE 4a Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
23 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ACB_HOR 28 Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
13 .uno%3AFlipVertical 28 Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3AED_CONNECT 92 Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the browse button (...) and then locate the file that you want to link to.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_ALL_PAGES 35 Flips the selected graphic horizontally on all pages.
14 CUI_HID_MACRO_MACROS 72 Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign.
1e CUI_HID_MACRO_HEADERTABLISTBOX 2a Lists the events that can trigger a macro.
13 CUI_HID_MACRO_GROUP 3f Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_CLIENT 3c Uses the image map that you created for the selected object.
1f sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_URL%3AED_URL 3a Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_URL%3AED_NAME 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_SERVER 1d Uses a server-side image map.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FRM_URL%3APB_SEARCH 49 Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open.
e SW_HID_FRM_URL 56 Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_FRAME 47 Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_PREV f8 Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_SIZE 24 Locks the size of the selected item.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_TEXTFLOW a3 Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PRINT_FRAME 37 Includes the selected item when you print the document.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_FRAME 40 Locks the position of the selected item in the current document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_EDIT_IN_READONLY 5d Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected).
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_CONTENT 36 Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3AED_NAME 23 Enter a name for the selected item.
e SW_HID_FRM_ADD 3f Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3AED_ALT_NAME 91 Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_NEXT df Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty.
12 .uno%3AFrameDialog 6a Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 7d Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FULL 49 Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_BOTTOM_DIST 73 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_LEFT 3a Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin.
13 SW_HID_FORMAT_TABLE 52 Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ACB_REL_WIDTH 42 Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_RIGHT 3c Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_RIGHT_DIST 69 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_WIDTH 1d Enter the width of the table.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FREE 71 Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FROM_LEFT 63 Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_TOP_DIST 70 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_LEFT_DIST 68 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_NAME 69 Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_CENTER 2b Centers the table horizontally on the page.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3AED_SPACE 8a Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACB_MOD_TBL 4f Maintains the current width of the table when you change the width of a column.
2f sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_BTN_UP 44 Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_3 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_1 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_2 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_4 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_BTN_DOWN 43 Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_6 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACB_PROP 47 Resizes the table width in relation to the column width that you enter.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_5 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_SPLIT_ROW 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_PAGEBREAK 63 Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_PAGECOLL 56 Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_BREAKCOLUMN 48 Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 33 Enter the number of rows to include in the heading.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_PAGECOLL 56 Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_PAGEBREAKAFTER 2f Inserts a page or column break after the table.
f .uno%3ARowSplit 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_HEADLINE 50 Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_BREAKPAGE 2f Inserts a page break before or after the table.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_PAGEBREAKBEFORE 30 Inserts a page or column break before the table.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_KEEP 4f Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 31 Select the orientation for the text in the cells.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_SPLIT 40 Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table.
15 SW_HID_TABLE_TEXTFLOW 42 Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ANF_PAGENUM 40 Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_VERTORIENT 3f Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table.
e .uno%3AProtect 40 Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
19 .uno%3AUnsetCellsReadOnly 48 Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table.
13 .uno%3ASetRowHeight 2a Changes the height of the selected row(s).
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROW_HEIGHT%3ACB_AUTOHEIGHT 48 Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROW_HEIGHT%3AED_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s).
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 45 Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 29 Selects the row that contains the cursor.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 2b Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
15 .uno%3ASetColumnWidth 2c Changes the width of the selected column(s).
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COL_WIDTH%3AED_WIDTH 39 Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).
2a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COL_WIDTH%3AED_COL 46 Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of.
1c .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidth 47 Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 2c Selects the column that contains the cursor.
19 .uno%3AInsertColumnDialog 20 Inserts a column into the table.
16 .uno%3AInsertRowDialog 1d Inserts a row into the table.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 2e Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ARID_STYLECATALOG%3ABT_TOOL 38 These are the different categories of formatting styles.
18 SW_HID_COND_COLL_TABLIST c7 Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3ACB_CONDITION 3c Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3APB_REMOVE 48 Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3APB_ASSIGN 4a Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3ALB_STYLE 5f A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box.
10 .uno%3ACharStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for characters.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN a0 Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 89 Use the Styles and Formatting window to apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply the style.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE a5 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window.
10 .uno%3AListStyle 3b Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for paragraphs.
10 .uno%3APageStyle 25 Displays formatting styles for pages.
11 .uno%3AFrameStyle 26 Displays formatting styles for frames.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 75 Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 59 Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection.
16 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EXEC 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
17 .uno%3AOnlineAutoFormat 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_BORDER 33 Includes border styles in the selected table style.
14 SW_HID_AUTOFMT_TABLE 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
2e sw%3AMoreButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_MORE 4d Displays more formatting options for tables. Click again to hide the options.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_ALIGNMENT 38 Includes alignment settings in the selected table style.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_ADD 23 Adds a new table style to the list.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_FONT 35 Includes font formatting in the selected table style.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_PATTERN 37 Includes background styles in the selected table style.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_NUMFORMAT 37 Includes numbering formats in the selected table style.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_RENAME 5b Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style.
11 .uno%3AAutoFormat 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_REMOVE 21 Deletes the selected table style.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ALB_FORMAT 6d Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_OFADLG_PRCNT_SET%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN 61 Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width.
16 .uno%3AAutoFormatApply 72 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect            Options.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_ACCEPT 26 Applies all of the formatting changes.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_REJECT 26 Rejects all of the formatting changes.
1a SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EDIT_CHG 91 Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date.
1d .uno%3AAutoFormatRedlineApply a3 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialog, you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_MERGE_STYLE 5e Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_PAGE_STYLE 4b Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_TEXT_STYLE 62 Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document.
17 SW_HID_LTEMPL_NUMBERING 50 Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document.
2d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_NUM_STYLE 50 Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document.
29 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_REGION 65 Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_TEXT 62 Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_FRAME_STYLE 4c Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document.
13 SW_HID_LTEMPL_FRAME 4c Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document.
2f sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3APB_LOAD_FILE 51 Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open.
16 SW_HID_LTEMPL_OVERRIDE 5e Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading.
11 .uno%3ALoadStyles 56 Imports formatting styles from another document or template into the current document.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_PAGE 4b Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_TEMPLATE 38 Lists the available templates for the selected category.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_BORDER 30 Splits the table without copying the header row.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_BOX_PARA 77 Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_BOX_NOPARA 34 Inserts an additional blank row in the second table.
11 .uno%3ASplitTable 49 Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_CNTNT 52 Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table.
11 .uno%3AMergeTable 8c Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph.
11 CUI_HID_HYPHENATE 2d Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_RIGHT 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
3b svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_HYPH_CONTINUE 48 Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate.
39 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_HYPH_DELETE 3e Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word.
2b svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3AED_WORD 3d Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_LEFT 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 47 Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line.
14 SW_HID_DLG_WORDCOUNT 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
16 .uno%3AWordCountDialog 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
13 SW_HID_OUTLINE_FORM 6a Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents.
1a SW_HID_NUM_OUTL_NUM_SAVEAS 8e Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document.
1a SW_HID_NUM_OUTL_NAMED_NUMS 5c Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
1d .uno%3AChapterNumberingDialog 5c Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_NUM_NAMES%3AED_FORM 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_NUM_NAMES%3ALB_FORM 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_CHARFMT 2d Select the format of the numbering character.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3AED_SUFFIX 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 94 Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_NUMBER 50 Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3AED_PREFIX 42 Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3AED_START 43 Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_LEVEL 66 Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_COLL 51 Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
15 .uno%3AFootnoteDialog 3a Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_TEXT_CHARFMT 5e Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_ANCHR_CHARFMT 67 Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_CONT_FROM c7 Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page.
17 SW_HID_FOOTNOTE_OPTIONS 34 Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PARA_TEMPL 31 Select the paragraph style for the footnote text.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PAGE_TEMPL 39 Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_NUMVIEW 4a Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ARB_POS_CHAPTER 3a Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_CONT ca Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ARB_POS_PAGE 2d Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_PREFIX 59 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_NUMCOUNT 2e Select the numbering option for the footnotes.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AFLD_OFFSET 8a Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_SUFFIX 53 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_NUMVIEW 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_ANCHR_CHARFMT 66 Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document.
2f sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PAGE_TEMPL 38 Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes.
16 SW_HID_ENDNOTE_OPTIONS 26 Specifies the formatting for endnotes.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AED_PREFIX 58 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_TEXT_CHARFMT 5c Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area.
2f sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PARA_TEMPL 30 Select the paragraph style for the endnote text.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AED_SUFFIX 52 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AFLD_OFFSET 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_BORDER 2f Adds a border to the table and the table cells.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 27 Does not divide the table across pages.
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 25 Repeats the first n rows as a header.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_PARA 40 Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_SEMI 45 Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_TAB 3a Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_HEADER 34 Formats the first row of the new table as a heading.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 3b Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_KEEPCOLUMN 50 Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker.
17 .uno%3AConvertTableText 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ARB_OTHER 5d Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ABT_AUTOFORMAT 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3AED_OTHER 3b Type the character that you want to use as a column marker.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_UP2 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_UP 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_DN 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_DN3 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
11 .uno%3ASortDialog 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_DN2 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_ROW 65 Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_KEY1 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3APB_DELIM 6c Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_KEY2 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_KEY2 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
10 .uno%3ATableSort 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_KEY3 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ADLB_KEY2 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_TABCH 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_TAB 56 If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_KEY3 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_KEY1 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_UP3 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ADLB_KEY3 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ALB_LANG 33 Select the language that defines the sorting rules.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ADLB_KEY1 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_CASE 7a Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_TABCH 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_COL 45 Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options.
13 .uno%3ACalculateSel 47 Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard.
11 .uno%3ARepaginate 78 Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar.
14 .uno%3ARemoveTableOf 23 Deletes the current index or table.
13 .uno%3AEditCurIndex 21 Edits the current index or table.
15 .uno%3AUpdateCurIndex 1a Updates the current index.
17 .uno%3AUpdateAllIndexes 98 Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_NUMBERING_ON 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3AMF_OFFSET 57 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_COUNT_FRAMELINES 9f Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ALB_POS 31 Select where you want the line numbers to appear.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ALB_FORMAT 30 Select the numbering style that you want to use.
1a .uno%3ALineNumberingDialog 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_COUNT_EMPTYLINES 2c Includes empty paragraphs in the line count.
2f sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 46 Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_RESTART_PAGE 40 Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3AED_DIVISOR 33 Enter the text that you want to use as a separator.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ANF_DIV_INTERVAL 3a Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ANF_NUM_INVERVAL 31 Enter the counting interval for the line numbers.
10 .uno%3AUpdateAll 64 Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateFields 3b Updates the contents of all fields in the current document.
15 .uno%3AUpdateAllLinks 2a Updates the links in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateCharts 2b Updates the charts in the current document.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 3e Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object.
12 .uno%3AMergeDialog 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
16 .uno%3AMailMergeWizard 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_NEWDOC 38 Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3APB_LOADDOC 46 Locate the Writer document that you want too use, and then click Open.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_RECENTDOC 4e Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_LOADDOC 52 Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ALB_RECENTDOC 14 Select the document.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3APB_BROWSETEMPLATE 29 Opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_CURRENTDOC 49 Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_LOADTEMPLATE 4a Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUTTYPE_PAGE%3ARB_MAIL 5c Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUTTYPE_PAGE%3ARB_LETTER 28 Creates a printable mail merge document.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ASSIGN 1e Opens the Match Fields dialog.
37 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE_CB_HIDE_EMPTY_PARA 2f Enable to leave empty lines out of the address.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3ACB_ADDRESS 31 Adds an address block to the mail merge document.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ADDRESSLIST 8d Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_SETTINGS 26 Opens the Select Address Block dialog.
2d SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_PB_ASSIGN 1e Opens the Match Fields dialog.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
31 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_CB_GREETINGLINE 12 Adds a salutation.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3APB_DOWN 1a Moves the salutation down.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_TOP 6a Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_LEFT 6c Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ACB_ALIGN 49 Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ALB_ZOOM 2c Select a magnification for the page preview.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_UP 18 Moves the salutation up.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 5a Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the main mail merge document for all recipients.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_NEXT 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3ACB_EXCLUDE 34 Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_LAST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIRST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3AED_RECORD 64 Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_PREV 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 3c Searches for whole words only and not parts of larger words.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3AED_FIND 68 Enter the text that you want to search for in the merged document, for example, the name of a recipient.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_BACKWARDS 45 Searches from the current cursor position to the top of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_MATCHCASE 47 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters in the search.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 59 Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the mail merge document for a single recipient.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIND 1a Click to start the search.
31 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVENOW 14 Saves the documents.
32 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTNOW 20 Prints the mail merge documents.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDDOCUMENTS 1f Click to start sending e-mails.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDMAIL 36 Sends the output as e-mail messages to all recipients.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDAS 7d Opens the E-Mail Message dialog where you can enter the e-mail message for the mail merge files that are sent as attachments.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVESTARTDOC 3e Saves the starting document that contains the database fields.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_FROM 77 Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEINDIVIDUAL cf Saves the merged document as a separate file for each recipient. The file names of the documents are constructed from the name that you enter, followed by an underscore, and the number of the current record.
39 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTERSETTINGS 1f Changes the printer properties.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_SENDAS 2f Select the mail format for the e-mail messages.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_MAILTO 4c Select the database field that contains the e-mail address of the recipient.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDALL 29 Select to send e-mails to all recipients.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_COPYTO 4f Opens the Copy To dialog where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEMERGEDDOC 1a Saves the merged document.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINT 2d Prints the output for all or some recipients.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_PRINT 13 Select the printer.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_SUBJECT 2f Enter the subject line for the e-mail messages.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEASONE 2b Saves the merged document as a single file.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINTALL 24 Prints documents for all recipients.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVESTARTDOC 1b Saves the current document.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_ATTACHMENT 21 Shows the name of the attachment.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_TO 41 Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_FROM 42 Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_COPYTO%3AED_BCC 4a Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_COPYTO%3AED_CC 44 Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_LEFT 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
3a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_RIGHT 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
40 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_REMOVEFIELD 2f Removes the selected field from the other list.
16 SW_HID_MM_CUSTOMFIELDS 34 Select a field and drag the field to the other list.
3b sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AED_DRAG 3d Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons.
37 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3ACB_FIELD 50 Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields.
37 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_UP 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_DOWN 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
40 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_INSERTFIELD 73 Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once.
2b SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_CB_GREETINGLINE 20 Adds a salutation to the e-mail.
29 SW_MULTILINEEDIT_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_MLE_BODY 22 Enter the main text of the e-mail.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3AED_COUNTRY 3a Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_ALWAYS 3e Includes country or regional information in the address block.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_NEVER 40 Excludes country or regional information from the address block.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_CUSTOMIZE 58 Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_DELETE 2a Deletes the selected address block layout.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_NEW 53 Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_DEPENDENT 86 Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box.
19 SW_HID_MM_ADDRESSLIST_TLB 5d Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_CREATELIST 4b Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_LOADLIST 5d Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_FILTER 82 Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_EDIT 50 Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_TABLE 58 Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG%3APB_PREVIEW 27 Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog.
26 SW_HID_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG_LISTBOX 3f Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses.
17 .uno%3ADefaultNumbering 3e Engade ou elimina a numeración dos parágrafos seleccionados.
12 .uno%3AChainFrames 2c Liga o marco seleccionado ao marco seguinte.
13 .uno%3AUnhainFrames 14 Desliga dous marcos.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows e2 Inserir unha ou máis filas na táboa, na parte inferior da selección. Pode inserir máis dunha fila abrindo a caixa de diálogo (escolla  Táboa - Inserir - Filas), ou seleccionando máis dunha fila antes de premer na icona.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns e4 Inserir unha ou máis columnas na táboa, despois da selección. Para inserir varias columnas ao mesmo tempo, abra a caixa de diálogo (escolla Táboa - Inserir - Columnas), ou selccione varias columnas antes de premer na icona.
13 .uno%3ATableModeFix 75 Se este modo está activo os cambios realizados nunha fila e/ou columna só afectan ás filas ou columnas adxacentes.
17 .uno%3ATableModeFixProp 5d Se este modo está activo os cambios realizados na fila e/ou columna afectan a toda a táboa.
18 .uno%3ATableModeVariable 65 Se este modo está activo os cambios realizados nunha fila e/ou columna afectan ao tamaño da táboa.
e .uno%3AAutoSum 69 Activa a función de suma. Teña en conta que o cursor debe estar na cela onde desexa que apareza a suma.
14 .uno%3ARemoveBullets 51 Desactiva a numeración ou as viñetas no parágrafo actual ou nos seleccionados.
19 .uno%3ADecrementSubLevels 39 Move os parágrafos con subpuntos un nivel cara a abaixo.
19 .uno%3AIncrementSubLevels 39 Move os parágrafos con subpuntos un nivel cara a arriba.
1d .uno%3AInsertNeutralParagraph 52 Inserir un parágrafo sen numeración. A numeración existente non se ve afectada.
15 .uno%3AMoveUpSubItems 4a Move un parágrafo con subpuntos e o coloca enriba do parágrafo anterior.
17 .uno%3AMoveDownSubItems 47 Sitúa un parágrafo cos seus subpuntos debaixo do seguinte parágrafo.
15 .uno%3ANumberingStart 20 Reinicia a numeración do texto.
16 .uno%3AStatePageNumber 110 O número da páxina actual móstrase neste campo da barra de estado. Para navegar polo documento prema dúas veces para abrir o Navegador. Prema co botón dereito do rato para mostrar os marcadores existentes. Prema nun marcador para colocar o cursor do texto nese lugar.
14 .uno%3AStatusBarFunc 28 Mostra a información sobre o documento.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 43 Aumenta o zoom para obter unha visión máis achegada do documento.
10 .uno%3AZoomMinus 38 Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 38 Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size.
14 SW_HID_PVIEW_ZOOM_LB 3a Determina o nivel de zoom da previsualización de páxina.
13 .uno%3AShowTwoPages 3d Mostra dúas páxinas na xanela Previsualización de páxina.
12 .uno%3APreviewZoom d5 Define o número de páxinas mostradas na pantalla. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir unha grade e seleccionar o número de páxinas que desexa mostrar como filas e columnas na previsualización.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_ZOOM%3AED_COL 33 Define o número de páxinas mostradas en columnas.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_ZOOM%3AED_ROW 27 Define o número de filas das páxinas.
18 .uno%3AShowMultiplePages d5 Define o número de páxinas mostradas na pantalla. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir unha grade e seleccionar o número de páxinas que desexa mostrar como filas e columnas na previsualización.
13 .uno%3AShowBookview 4d Selecciónea para mostrar a primeira páxina á dereita da previsualización.
3d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PORTRAIT 23 Prints the page in portrait format.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_RMARGIN 21 Specifies the right margin width.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_HMARGIN 3a Determines the horizontal distance between document pages.
1a .uno%3APreviewPrintOptions 4c Opens a dialog where settings for the printout of your document can be made.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_BMARGIN 23 Specifies the bottom margin height.
18 FN_PREVIEW_PRINT_OPTIONS 4c Opens a dialog where settings for the printout of your document can be made.
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_ROWS 4a Defines the number of rows of pages (horizontally stacked document pages).
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_COLS 4f Defines the number of pages shown in columns (vertically tiled document pages).
3e sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 24 Prints the page in landscape format.
3c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3APB_STANDARD a6 Specifies that the system will not use a fixed number of rows and columns when printing out the page view, but rather uses what was originally shown in the page view.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_LMARGIN 20 Specifies the left margin width.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_TMARGIN 20 Specifies the top margin height.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_VMARGIN 38 Determines the vertical distance between document pages.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_AND 2b Proba os valores coincidentes co E booleano
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SIN 1a Calcula o seno en radiáns
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NOT 2d Proba os valores coincidentes co NON booleano
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SQRT 18 Calcula a raíz cadrada.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GEQ 41 Comproba se un valor é maior ou igual a outro valor especificado
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MAX 2d Calcula o valor máximo dunha área ou lista.
16 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LISTSEP 20 Separa os elementos dunha lista.
11 SW_HID_MN_POP_OPS 2b Pode inserir varios operadores na fórmula.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NEQ 34 Verifica se os valores seleccionados son diferentes.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GRE 3b Comproba se os valores son maiores que o valor especificado
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LES 3b Comproba se os valores son menores que o valor especificado
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_PHD 17 Calcula unha porcentaxe
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_TAN 1f Calcula a tanxente en radiáns.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MEAN 3d Calcula a media aritmética dos valores dunha área ou lista.
12 SW_HID_MN_POP_FUNC 36 Escolla entre as seguintes funcións trigonométricas:
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LEQ 42 Verifica se un valor é menor ou igual a outro valor especificado.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ASIN 20 Calcula o arco seno en radiáns.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ACOS 22 Calcula o arco coseno en radiáns.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SUM 27 Calcula a suma das celas seleccionadas.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MIN 2d Calcula o valor mínimo dunha área ou lista.
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_OR 2f Comproba se os valores coinciden co OU booleano
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_XOR 39 Comproba se os valores coinciden co exclusivo booleano OU
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_EQ 30 Comproba se os valores seleccionados son iguais.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_COS 1d Calcula o coseno en radiáns.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_POW 1f Calcula a potencia dun número.
17 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CALC 39 Abre un submenú, que permite inserir fórmulas en celas.
14 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ROUND 38 Arredonda un número conforme os decimais especificados.
18 SW_HID_MN_POP_STATISTICS 33 Escolla entre as seguintes funcións estatísticas:
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ATAN 24 Calcula o arco tanxente en radiáns.
19 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CANCEL 41 Limpa o contido da liña de entrada e pecha a barra de fórmulas.
18 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_APPLY 91 Transfire o contido da liña de entrada ao documento e pecha a barra de fórmula. O contido da liña de entrada insírese na posición do cursor.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_FORMULA 89 Permite crear fórmulas ao teclear directamente na liña de entrada ou ao premer na icona Fórmula para mostrar as fórmulas no submenú.
12 SW_HID_INSERT_CTRL 68 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións para a inserción de marcos, imaxes, táboas e outros obxectos.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl 68 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións para a inserción de marcos, imaxes, táboas e outros obxectos.
16 .uno%3AInsertFieldCtrl 6c Prema para abrir a caixa de diálogo Campos. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir o submenú.
15 HID_INSERT_FIELD_CTRL 6c Prema para abrir a caixa de diálogo Campos. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir o submenú.
16 .uno%3AInsertDateField 23 Insire a data actual como un campo.
16 .uno%3AInsertTimeField 20 Insire a hora actual como campo.
1c .uno%3AInsertPageNumberField 48 Insire o número da páxina actual como un campo na posición do cursor.
1b .uno%3AInsertPageCountField 3e Insire como un campo o número total de páxinas do documento.
17 .uno%3AInsertTopicField 45 Insire como campo o asunto especificado nas propiedades do documento.
17 .uno%3AInsertTitleField 49 Insire como un campo o título especificado nas propiedades do documento.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 48 Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field.
e .uno%3AGraphic a4 Se a icona Activar/Desactivar imaxe  da barra Ferramentas está activada, non se mostra ningunha imaxe e os marcos baleiros móstranse como marcadores de posición.
13 .uno%3AShadowCursor 2b Activates or deactivates the direct cursor.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 5b Estas orde aplícanselle ao documento actual, abra un documento novo ou peche o aplicativo.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 45 Este menú contén ordes para editar os contidos do documento actual.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 51 Este menú contén ordes para controlar a presentación en pantalla do documento.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu c6 O menú Inserir contén ordes para inserción de elementos novos no documento. Isto inclúe seccións, notas, notas a pé, comentarios, caracteres especiais, gráficos e obxecto doutros aplicativos.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 40 Contén ordes para formatar o deseño e o contido de documentos.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu ca Contén ferramentas de corrección, unha galería de obxectos de arte que pode engadir ao seu documento, así como ferramentas para configuración de menús e configuración de preferencias do programa.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 40 Contén ordes para manipular e visualizar xanelas de documentos.
19 .uno%3AConvertTableToText 49 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode converter a táboa actual en texto.
19 .uno%3AConvertTextToTable 4f Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode converter en táboa o texto seleccionado.
10 .uno%3ATableMenu 57 Mostra ordes para inserir, editar e eliminar unha táboa dentro dun documento de texto.
18 .uno%3AHeadingRowsRepeat 69 Se a táboa se estende por máis dunha páxina, repite as cabeceiras das táboas nas páxinas seguintes .
12 .uno%3ADeleteTable 18 Elimina a táboa actual.
12 .uno%3ASelectTable 1b Seleccione a táboa actual.
11 .uno%3AEntireCell 19 Selecciona a cela actual.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 65 O texto formatado nunha lingua de disposición complexa de texto introdúcese da dereita á esquerda.
10 HID_TEXT_TOOLBOX 41 A barra Formatado contén varias funcións de formatado de texto.
d .uno%3AShrink 38 Reduce o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado.
b .uno%3AGrow 39 Aumenta o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 2c O texto introdúcese da esquerda á dereita.
12 HID_GRAFIK_TOOLBOX 58 A barra Imaxe contén funcións de formatado e posicionamento de imaxes de mapa de bits.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX 7a A barra Táboa contén as funcións necesarias para traballar con táboas. Aparece se sitúa o cursor dentro dunha táboa.
10 HID_DRAW_TOOLBOX 149 Pódese ver a barra Propiedades do obxecto de debuxo no Writer e no Calc. Seleccione o menu Ver - Barras de ferramentas - Propiedades do obxecto de debuxo. Os controis activaranse cando seleccione un obxecto de debuxo. Veranse algunhas iconas diferentes predeterminadas, cando o documento sexa de texto ou unha folla de cálculo.
f HID_NUM_TOOLBOX b8 A barra Viñetas e numeración contén funcións para modificar a estrutura dos parágrafos numerados, incluído o cambio de orde dos parágrafos ou a definición de diferentes niveis.
11 .uno%3AZoomSlider b8 Arrastre o control de zoom deslizante á esquerda para mostrar máis páxinas, arrastre cara a dereita para aumentar dentro dunha páxina e mostrar unha área máis pequena da páxina.
15 .uno%3ALanguageStatus 19b Mostra o idioma do texto seleccionado. Prema para abrir un menú onde poida escoller outro idioma para o texto seleccionado ou para o parágrafo actual. Seleccione Ningún para excluír o texto da corrección e guionización. Seleccione Restabelecer o idioma predeterminado para reaplicar o idioma predeterminado na selección ou no parágrafo. Escolla Máis para abrir uma caixa de diálogo con máis opcións.
11 .uno%3AViewLayout c6 As iconas do deseño de visualización móstranse de esquerda a dereita: modo de columna única. Modo de visualización con páxinas a cada lado. Modo libro con dúas páxinas coma nun libro aberto.
14 .uno%3AInsertFormula 4e A barra de fórmulas permite crear e inserir cálculos en documentos de texto.
11 HID_FRAME_TOOLBOX 71 Cando un marco está seleccionado, a barra Marco fornece as funcións máis importantes para formatalo e situalo.
f HID_OLE_TOOLBOX 9a A barra Obxecto OLE aparece cando os obxectos están seleccionados. Contén as funcións máis importantes para o formatado e posicionamento dos obxectos.
15 HID_DRAW_TEXT_TOOLBOX 46 Contén ordes de formatado para textos contidos en obxectos de debuxo.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
2c starmath%3APushButton%3ARID_SYMBOLDIALOG%3A2 4e Aplica os valores modificados ou seleccionados sen pechar a caixa de diálogo.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 49 Restabelece na caixa de diálogo os valores de instalación predefinidos.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_REMOVE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
2c sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_COPY%3ABTN_SET_DEFAULT 49 Restabelece na caixa de diálogo os valores de instalación predefinidos.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATCOL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 35 Restabelece os valores predefinidos de $[officename].
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_PRINTAREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
2e sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ARB_ASSIGN 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELABBREV 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
2e sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATROW 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD 49 Restabelece na caixa de diálogo os valores de instalación predefinidos.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_FORMULACELL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
3b sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_CRITERIA_AREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN c2 Desfai as alteracións realizadas no separador, restabelecendo a configuración existente antes de abrir a caixa de diálogo. Non se solicitará confirmación cando se peche a caixa de diálogo.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
43 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DEST_AREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELDOUBLECAPS 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DEL 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_REMOVE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_VARCELL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ARB_DBAREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_DATA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DATA_AREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_AREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT 9e Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 27 Insire a imaxe seleccionada como fondo.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 3c Insire no documento o elemento que moveu para o portapapeis.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 30 Habilita un obxecto seleccionado para renomealo.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copia no portapapeis o elemento seleccionado.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 40 Actualiza a visualización da xanela ou do obxecto seleccionado.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY b3 Elimina a selección actual. Se hai varios obxectos seleccionados, elimínanse todos. A maioría das veces, aparece unha solicitude de confirmación antes de eliminar os obxectos.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 4d $[officename] carga e garda os ficheiros no formato OpenDocument por defecto.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 58 Activa a visualización dunha descrición breve de menús e iconas no apuntador do rato.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 5d Activa a visualización dos nomes de iconas no apuntador do rato e noutros contidos da Axuda.
13 .uno%3AHelperDialog 9d Allows you to activate the automatic Help Agent. You can also activate the Help Agent through $[officename] - General - Help Agent in the Options dialog box.
2f svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_COLOR_DEPTH 41 Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color.
34 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ANF_COMPRESSION da Sets the compression and quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size. A high compression means a low quality, a low compression means a high quality.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ANF_RESOLUTION 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
2e svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_RESOLUTION 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
2d svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3AMF_SIZEX 14 Specifies the width.
3c svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COMPRESSION_NONE 32 Specifies that you do not wish to use compression.
2f svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_INTERLACED 40 Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_SAVE_TRANSPARENCY ba Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture.
2e svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_BINARY 52 Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file.
32 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_LEVEL2 73 Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics.
39 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COLOR_FORMAT1 1a Exports the file in color.
29 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_SIZEX 20 Specifies the measurement units.
2d svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3AMF_SIZEY 15 Specifies the height.
3b svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COMPRESSION_LZW 66 LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm.
35 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_EPS_PREVIEW_EPSI b6 Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code.
2c svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_TEXT 57 Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file.
35 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_EPS_PREVIEW_TIFF 6a Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file.
31 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_RLE_ENCODING 36 Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics.
39 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COLOR_FORMAT2 24 Exports the file in grayscale tones.
32 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_LEVEL1 8c Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 41 Select the character set from the options used for import/export.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 48 Escolla ou introduza o delimitador de campo, que separa campos de datos.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 34 Exporta todos os campos de datos cunha largura fixa.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 52 Escolla ou introduza o delimitador de texto, que inclúe todos os campos de datos.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 4c Especifica o conxunto de caracteres utilizados para a exportación de texto.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CHARSET 44 Especifica o conxunto de caracteres utilizado no ficheiro importado.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_ASONCE 47 Combina delimitadores consecutivos e elimina campos de datos en branco.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_QUOTED_AS_TEXT b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
29 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_TYPE1 77 Escolla unha columna na xanela de visualización e seleccione o tipo de datos a que desexa aplicar os datos importados.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_COMMA 32 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por comas.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CUSTOMLANG 2f Determines how the number strings are imported.
2c sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_TEXTSEP 5c Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SPACE 34 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por espazos.
2d sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_FIXED 4a Separa en columnas os datos de largura fixa (igual número de caracteres).
2f sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ANF_AT_ROW 36 Especifica a liña onde desexa iniciar a importación.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_OTHER 8f Separa datos en columnas, empregando o separador personalizado especificado. Nota: O separador personalizado tamén debe facer parte dos datos.
3a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_DETECT_SPECIAL_NUMBER 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_SEPARATED 2b Seleccione o separador utilizado nos datos.
29 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_TAB 38 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por tabuladores.
22 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII 3b Configura as opcións de importación de datos delimitados.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SEMICOLON 39 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por punto e coma.
26 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3AED_OTHER 8f Separa datos en columnas, empregando o separador personalizado especificado. Nota: O separador personalizado tamén debe facer parte dos datos.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 64 The Warning Print Options dialog appears when the page setup does not match the defined print range.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT 72 Specifies that anything extending beyond the maximum print range will be cut off and not included in the printing.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_LF 45 Aplica unha "quebra de liña con sangría" como quebra de parágrafo.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_LANGUAGE 76 Especifica o idioma do texto, se aínda non foi definido. Esta configuración só está dispoñíbel cando se importa.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_FONT bc Configurando un tipo de letra predefinido está a especificar que o texto debe mostrarse nun tipo de letra específico. Os tipos de letra predefinidos só se poden seleccionar ao importar.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CRLF 62 Aplica un "retorno de carro" e unha "quebra de liña con sangría". Esta é a opción predefinida.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_CHARSET 59 Especifica o conxunto de caracteres do ficheiro para a súa exportación ou importación.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CR 37 Aplica un "retorno de carro" como quebra de parágrafo.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 32 Insire o gráfico seleccionado como unha ligazón.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 55 Insire unha copia do obxecto gráfico seleccionado, directamente dentro do documento.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 38 Elimina o gráfico selecionado despois da confirmación.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 41 Define como é inserido un obxecto gráfico dentro dun documento.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 3a Atribúe un título a un obxecto seleccionado da Galería.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 39 A orde Previsualización  mostra o gráfico seleccionado.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 3e Define todos os gráficos para seren invisíbeis no documento.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 5e Se desactivou a visualización de imaxes, escolla a ordeCargar imaxes para as facer visíbeis.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 42 Copia no portapapeis a ligazón situada baixo o apuntador do rato.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 29 Permite gardar o fondo dunha páxina web.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 47 Abre unha caixa de diálogo en que se pode gardar a imaxe seleccionada.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 23 Desactiva as extensións inseridas.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2d Copia unha imaxe seleccionada no portapapeis.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 16 Mostra o nome do tema.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 25 Creates a new $[officename] document.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 38 Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 64 Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). The Presentation Wizard dialog appears.
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 1c Creates a new HTML document.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 93 Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 92 Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 1e Creates a new master document.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 1e Creates a new XForms document.
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 33 Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 34 Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 34 Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw).
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 52 Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 34 Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 57 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates and Documents.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 34 Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math).
b slot%3A5500 4d Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 3e Displays the properties for the selected template or document.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 38 Allows you to preview the selected template or document.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 29 Prints the selected template or document.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 28 Moves up one folder level, if available.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW c7 Lists the available templates or documents for the selected category. Select a template or document and, then click Open. To preview the document, click the Preview button above the box on the right.
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL ad Categories are shown in the box on the left side of the Templates and Documents dialog. Click a category to display the files associated with that category in the Title box.
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 3b Adds, removes, or rearranges templates or sample documents.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 30 Moves back to the previous window in the dialog.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 43 Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document.
13 SW_HID_LABEL_INSERT 23 Creates a new document for editing.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_TYPE eb Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
2d sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3AEDT_WRITING 5a Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_ADDR 66 Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DATABASE 4b Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_MAKE 2f Select the brand of paper that you want to use.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DBFIELD 86 Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_SHEET 23 Prints labels on individual sheets.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_CONT 22 Prints labels on continuous paper.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_INSERT 86 Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.
e SW_HID_LAB_LAB 3f Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_TABLE 55 Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_LEFT a3 Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
28 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3ACB_MAKE 22 Enter or select the desired brand.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3APB_SAVE 30 Saves the current label or business card format.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_WIDTH 6f Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3AED_TYPE 1d Enter or select a label type.
e SW_HID_LAB_FMT 1d Set paper formatting options.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_UPPER 98 Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_VDIST c8 Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
2a sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HEIGHT 6c Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_COLUMNS 59 Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HDIST 8b Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_ROWS 5a Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_COL 59 Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_ROW 58 Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_SINGLE 32 Prints a single label or  business card on a page.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ACB_SYNCHRON af Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC 71 Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PAGE 31 Creates a full page of  labels or business cards.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 1f Opens the Printer Setup dialog.
e SW_HID_LAB_PRT 6f Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronization and printer settings.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 2a Design and create your own business cards.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 2a Prints business cards on continuous paper.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 2b Prints business cards on individual sheets.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE dd Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 2f Select the brand of paper that you want to use.
1c SW_HID_BUSINESS_CARD_CONTENT 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_VISITING_CARDS%3ALB_AUTO_TEXT_GROUP 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PROFESSION 23 Enter the title of your profession.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT_2 4b Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME_2 4c Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PHONE 21 Enter your home telephone number.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STATE 30 Enter the name of the country in which you live.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME_2 4d Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_WWW 2c Enter the address of your internet homepage.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_WWW 36 Enter the address of your company's internet homepage.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_SLOGAN 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP_EXT 21 Enter additional company details.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_PHONE 25 Enter your business telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STATE 3d Enter the name of the country where your business is located.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 18 Creates a new directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 23 Click to delete all selected files.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
47 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_STANDARD 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 7b Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 3c Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
b .uno%3AOpen 1c Abre ou importa un ficheiro.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 48 Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 1c Abre ou importa un ficheiro.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DEFAULTDIRECTORY 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 18 Creates a new directory.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_THEMA 61 Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_TITLE 1f Enter a title for the document.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_KEYWORDS ad Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons.
32 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_COMMENT 2d Enter comments to help identify the document.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODESC 34 Contains descriptive information about the document.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_DELETE a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3AED_FILE_NAME 17 Displays the file name.
31 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ACB_USE_USERDATA 92 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
13 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODOC 32 Contains basic information about the current file.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_CUSTOMPROPERTIES%3ABTN_ADD 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
1e SFX2_HID_CTRL_CUSTOMPROPERTIES ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO1 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFOUSER 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO4 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO3 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO2 ae Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
f SW_HID_DOC_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
16 SFX2_HID_DOCINFORELOAD 37 Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page.
32 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_RELOAD 40 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3APB_BROWSEURL 3b Locate the file that you want to open, and then click Open.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_NOAUTOUPDATE 24 User must refresh the page manually.
38 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_FORWARDUPDATE 5c Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_URL 38 Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open.
33 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_FORWARD 57 Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file.
2d sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ACB_FRAME 6f If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_RELOADUPDATE 87 Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser.
28 HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2a HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
1f SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_PROTECTION d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
22 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
30 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
3a HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
23 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_RECORD_CHANGES 50 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record.
38 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2d HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
20 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
32 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
27 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_OPEN_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
17 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINT 47 Prints the name and properties of the styles that are used in the file.
1f SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINTER_SETUP 3f Changes the printer and its settings for the selected document.
2b sfx2%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_EDIT 48 Contains commands for managing and editing your templates and documents.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_DELETE 1e Deletes the current selection.
1b SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_FROM 96 Imports an additional template. To import a template, select a template folder in the list, click the Command button, and then select Import template.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_FILES 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
19 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_TO 1e Exports the selected template.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_LEFT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
1b SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_LEFT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
15 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_NEW 20 Creates a new template category.
2c sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_RIGHT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_DEL 5c Select a $[officename] document type to reset the default template to the original template.
16 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_RIGHT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
10 .uno%3AOrganizer 63 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize templates and define default templates.
36 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_ADDRESSTEMPLATE 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_RESCAN 22 Updates the contents of the lists.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_ADD 71 Uses the selected template as the default template when you create a new $[officename] document of the same type.
22 SVT_HID_ADDRTEMPL_FIELD_ASSIGNMENT 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
35 svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_TABLE 2c Select the data table for your address book.
49 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3APB_ADMINISTATE_DATASOURCES 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
3a svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_DATASOURCE 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 54 Opens the Template Management dialog where you can organize or create new templates.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 3b Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3AProperties 6a Opens the printer properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 29 Select how many slides to print per page.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 35 Specifies whether to print the current date and time.
33 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3APrinterList f9 The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 3f Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3ASingleJobs 68 Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 32 Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ARowsBox 16 Select number of rows.
20 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOK 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2a Select which pages of a brochure to print.
30 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AOrderBox 2e Select order in which pages are to be printed.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 2d Specifies to print colors as black and white.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ACopies 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APageMarginBox 3e Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APagesPerSheet 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 7b Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background).
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 86 For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 37 Specifies whether to print the page name of a document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
c HID_PRINTDLG 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ACollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 182 If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AColumnsBox 19 Select number of columns.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 52 If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 5d Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ABorderBox 28 Check to draw a border around each page.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Specify how to scale slides in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APagesPerSheetBox 32 Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 27 Specifies to print colors as grayscale.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AOrientationBox 24 Select the orientation of the paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 26 Specifies to print in original colors.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 83 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 1b Prints the entire document.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3AToReverse 26 Check to print pages in reverse order.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ASheetMarginBox 37 Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3AToFile 29 Prints to a file instead of to a printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 2d Specify which pages to include in the output.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ADetailsBtn 37 Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 35 Select which parts of the document should be printed.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
42 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ABTN_PROPERTIES 4f Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 80 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 83 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used.
f .uno%3ASendMail 7e Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 2b Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_DELETE 1d Deletes the selected version.
21 sfx2%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_VERSIONS 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_OPEN 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
2d sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_COMPARE 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_COMMENTS%3AME_VERSIONS 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3ACB_SAVEONCLOSE 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_SAVE a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_VIEW 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 51 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
11 CUI_HID_PASTE_DLG 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AMD_PASTE_OBJECT%3ALB_INSERT_LIST 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
2e svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
34 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_CALC_SEARCHIN 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_REGEXP 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
34 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_ROWS 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2f svx%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_MORE 60 Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_ALL_SHEETS 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
36 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE_ALL 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
41 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
2d SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SELECTIONS 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
31 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_LAYOUTS cf Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
37 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_COLUMNS 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLE_WORDS 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
33 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_NOFORMAT 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_SOUNDS_LIKE a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
28 svx_ComboBox_RID_SVXDLG_SEARCH_ED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_JAP_OPTIONS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_OTHER 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_SHORTER 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ACB_RELAX 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_SIMILARITY 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3c cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_LONGER 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SIMILARITY 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 90 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 29 Insire un índice no documento principal.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 124 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a check mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a7 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you want to display.
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
29 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
34 SVX_MULTILINEEDIT_RID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL_EDT_DESCRIPTION 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
26 SVX%3AMODALDIALOG%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
2a SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_NAME 1b Enter a name for the image.
31 SVX%3ACOMBOBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3ACBB_TARGETS a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
34 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URLDESCRIPTION 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
16 CUI_HID_REDLINING_EDIT 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPT 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPTALL 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECTALL 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_DG_VIEW b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECT 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_UNDO 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
1b SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PAGE 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_BTN_REF 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK2 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6a Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 47 To display all of the records in a table, click the Remove Filter icon.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 4b Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
2a SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_SINGLE 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
2d SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_AUTOMATIC 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
25 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_CHK_BOOK 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_150 3e Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size.
2a SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_ED_COLUMNS 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
28 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
13 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_75 30 Displays the document at 75% of its actual size.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_200 33 Displays the document at two times its actual size.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
13 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_50 31 Displays the document at half of its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
27 SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_ED_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
b SID_VIEW050 31 Displays the document at half of its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
2b SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_COLUMNS 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
b SID_VIEW200 33 Displays the document at two times its actual size.
2d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3AED_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
2d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 7d In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility aa Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 12 Inserts a comment.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 1b Delete the current comment.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 1b Delete the current comment.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ALB_FONT 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ALB_SUBSET 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 87 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
19 CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
36 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3a cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_LANG_NOCJK 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
36 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
3c cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_SIZE_NOCJK 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_STYLE_NOCJK 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3b cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_NAME_NOCJK 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
34 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_UNDERLINE_COLOR 25 Select the color for the underlining.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_EFFECTS2 e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_INDIVIDUALWORDS 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_STRIKEOUT 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_UNDERLINE 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_POSITION 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_RELIEF e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
1c CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_EMPHASIS 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_FONTCOLOR 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_COLOR2 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_OVERLINE_COLOR 24 Select the color for the overlining.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_SHADOW 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_OUTLINE 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_OVERLINE 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_LEADZEROES 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_FORMAT 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_NEGRED 32 Changes the font color of negative numbers to red.
1d CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_INFO 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
1e CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_LB_FORMAT 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CATEGORY 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
1c CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_ADD 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_THOUSAND 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_COMMENT 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_DECIMALS 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ACB_SOURCEFORMAT 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
1f CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_REMOVE 23 Deletes the selected number format.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
14 CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CURRENCY 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3APB_EVENT 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
f SW_HID_CHAR_URL 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_VISITED bf Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_NAME 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_URL 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_NOT_VISITED c1 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_TEXT 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
27 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_TARGET 71 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3APB_URL 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_NORMALPOS 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_HIGHPOS 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ACB_PAIRKERNING 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_KERNING2 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_LOWPOS 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AMF_SCALE_WIDTH 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ALB_KERNING2 b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_FONTSIZE 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_HIGHLOW 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
1d CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ACB_HIGHLOW 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3AED_STARTBRACKET 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3AED_ENDBRACKET 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3ACB_TWOLINES 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_HANG_PUNC 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_FORBIDDEN 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_SCRIPT_SPACE 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
42 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTPERCENT 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_STD 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_AUTO 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_FLINEINDENT 12a Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position".
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
33 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DELALL 80 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
11 CUI_HID_TABULATOR 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINECOLOR 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_BOTTOM 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_PRESETS 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ACB_SYNC 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AED_SHADOWSIZE 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_LEFT 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_SHADOWS 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_RIGHT 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_SHADOWCOLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINESTYLE 6b Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_TOP 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
e CUI_HID_BORDER 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_SELECTOR 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_PARA_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_BGDCOLORSET 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_PREVIEW 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 71 Click a color. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting color. Click Automatic to reset a font color.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_TBL_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
1f CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
12 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND 24 Set the background color or graphic.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_LINK 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_BROWSE 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3AMF_COL_TRANS 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_AREA 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_TILE 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
1e CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_ALIGN 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_EXPAND 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LASTLINE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_NEXT 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_DESC 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
16 SFX2_HID_MANAGE_STYLES 27 Set the options for the selected style.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_NAME a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_BASE 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
2c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ACB_AUTO b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
2d sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_REGION 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_HEIGHT 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
2c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_ADAPT 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_TEXT_FLOW 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_TRAY ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
13 CUI_HID_FORMAT_PAGE 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_SIZE 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_HORZ 33 Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_REGISTER 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_REGISTER dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_VERT 31 Centers the cells vertically on the printed page.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
32 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_PORTRAIT 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_NUMBER_FORMAT 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_LAYOUT 60 Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_WIDTH 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
15 SC_HID_SC_HEADER_EDIT 18 Add or edit header text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_HEADER 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_HEIGHT 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 40 Changes the selected western characters to uppercase characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 88 Changes the case of characters in the selection. If the cursor is within a word and no text is selected, then the word is the selection.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 40 Changes the selected western characters to lowercase characters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_3 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_POSITION 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_4 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_2 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3APB_STYLIST 60 Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2f svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_1 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_1 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_3 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_4 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_2 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2b svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_ADJUST 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 34 Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
33 sfx2%3AComboBox%3ADLG_NEW_STYLE_BY_EXAMPLE%3ALB_COL 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SWDLG_STRINPUT%3AED_INPUT 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_NAME%3ANTD_EDT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_TITLE 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
41 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_DESC e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
11 CUI_HID_LINE_LINE 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
37 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
35 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAME%3AEDT_STRING d Enter a name.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3AEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
13 CUI_HID_LINE_ENDDEF 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ALB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 57 Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STEPCOUNT 5d Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
11 CUI_HID_AREA_AREA 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
2f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
33 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_ORIGINAL 8d Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative.
30 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_SCALE fd Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
32 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STRETCH 5a Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
39 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ANUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4a Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ACB_HATCHBCKGRD 6d Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
15 CUI_HID_AREA_GRADIENT 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_FROM 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_LOAD 23 Load a different list of gradients.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_ANGLE 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_ADD 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_FROM 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENT_TYPES 2b Select the gradient that you want to apply.
32 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_TO 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_SAVE 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_X cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_Y c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_TO 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_BORDER 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENTS 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_MODIFY 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_TYPE 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_ADD 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
12 CUI_HID_AREA_HATCH 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_HATCHINGS 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_LOAD 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
14 CUI_HID_TPHATCH_CTRL 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_MODIFY 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_COLOR 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 32 Select a background color for your bitmap pattern.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_COLOR 54 Select a foreground color, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_BITMAP 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BITMAPS 5b Select a bitmap in the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
2f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
43 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ALB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
15 CUI_HID_PAGE_TEXTATTR 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
1d CUI_HID_TEXTATTR_CTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_CONTOUR 54 Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FULL_WIDTH 48 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ANCHOR 0 
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
42 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 39 Resizes the text to fit the width of the selected object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
13 CUI_HID_TPSIZE_CTRL 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ACBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ORIENT 0 
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
17 CUI_HID_TPPOSITION_CTRL f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
43 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 3a Resizes the text to fit the height of the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL2 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL1 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_ANGLE 1c Rotates the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_SLANT 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 66 Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialog.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ALB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
39 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
29 cui%3ATabPage%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ANUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
11 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_ASIAN_VERTICAL 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ANF_DEGREES a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_VERALIGN 51 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_SHRINK aa Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_HORALIGN 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_HYPH 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
1a CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3AED_INDENT 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_WRAP 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
21 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_BORDER_LOCK 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_TXTSTACKED 17 Aligns text vertically.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 108 Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 45 Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1e Converts the texture to color.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 135 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl (Mac: Shift+Command), and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 74 Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 80 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
f .uno%3ASpelling 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 63 Skips all occurrences of the unknown word in the entire document and continues with the spellcheck.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 40 Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
35 svx%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AMB_LANGUAGE 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2b svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AED_REPL af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ABTN_LEFT 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ACB_WORD b6 Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text.
1c CUI_HID_CT_THES_ALTERNATIVES c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8d Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a5 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 af Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5f Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_APPLY%3APB_EDIT 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1e CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFORMAT_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
1f CUI_HID_OFACTL_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 12f Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_SHORT 47 Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_NEW_REPLACE 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_REPLACE f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3ACB_TEXT_ONLY 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWDOUBLECAPS 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_ABBREV d3 Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWABBREV 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOABBREV 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_DOUBLE_CAPS ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOCAPS 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_DOUBLE_CAPS b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_ABBREV 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
19 CUI_HID_AUTOCORR_LANGUAGE 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_DBL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
39 cui%3ACheckbox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_SGL_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_STARTQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STARTQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_QUOTE_SW_CLB 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_ENDQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_ENDQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT 9f To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 66 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR 9f To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST f7 When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ed Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_BULLET 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
1a CUI_HID_VALUESET_SINGLENUM 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
14 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUM 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PICK_BMP%3ACB_LINKED 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUMBMP 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_PREFIX 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ACB_RATIO 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3APB_BULLET 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_BUL_COLOR 2f Select a color for the current numbering style.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_START 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_ORIENT 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_CHARFMT 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMB_BITMAP 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_WIDTH 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
37 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_LEVEL 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_BUL_REL_SIZE 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_HEIGHT 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_SUFFIX a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_FMT 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
2e sw%3AMultiListBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT_AT 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
38 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_ALIGNED_AT 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN_2 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_LISTTAB 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
3f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LABEL_FOLLOWED_BY 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
18 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS c4 Mostra as bibliotecas e módulos nos cales pode abrir ou gardar as súas macros. Para gardar unha macro cun documento específico, abra o documento e, a continuación, abra esta caixa de diálogo.
34 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
33 basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_ED_MACRONAME 69 Mostra o nome da macro seleccionada. Para crear ou modificar o nome dunha macro, introduza aquí un nome.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 44 Abre a macro ou caixa de diálogo seleccionada para a súa edición.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 15 Crea unha biblioteca.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 4e Abre o editor de $[officename] Basic para modificar a biblioteca seleccionada.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_RUN 20 Executa ou garda a macro actual.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_ORG 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Organizador de diálogos, onde pode engadir, editar ou eliminar calquera módulo, caixa de diálogo ou biblioteca de macro existente.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_ASSIGN 6e Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 73 Localice a biblioteca de $[officename] Basic que desexa engadir á lista actual e, a continuación, prema en Abrir.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_DEL 2f Crea unha nova macro ou elimina a seleccionada.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 31 Mostra as macros e caixas de diálogo existentes.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
1a BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MACROS 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
33 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_REPEAT_PASSWD 32 Reenter the new password for the selected library.
10 SVX_HID_PASSWORD 32 Protexe cun contrasinal a biblioteca seleccionada.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLD_PASSWD 3a Introduza o contrasinal actual da biblioteca seleccionada.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_NEW_PASSWD 3d Introduza un novo contrasinal para a biblioteca seleccionada.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 40 Substitúe unha biblioteca do mesmo nome pola biblioteca actual.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 7e Engade a biblioteca seleccionada como ficheiro só de lectura. A biblioteca cárgase de novo cada vez que inicia %PRODUCTNAME.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS 7d Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
1b CUI_HID_SELECTOR_CATEGORIES 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
19 CUI_HID_SELECTOR_COMMANDS 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3AEDIT_MENU_NAME 76 Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_CONFIG_MENU_LISTBOX 6e Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 6c Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 79 Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT 99 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_SETTINGS_DIALOG 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_SAVE 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
1c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DELETE 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
1b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OPEN 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EDIT 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
19 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NEW 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_LIST 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TABPAGE_BASIC 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
1f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXTENSION 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NAME 5a Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DESCRIPTION 1b Enter a comment (optional).
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_APPLICATION 3c Select the application that you want to use with the filter.
24 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_INTERFACE_NAME 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
1d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DOCTYPE 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
19 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DTD 6e If you want, enter the public or system identifier of the DTD (Document Type Definition) that you want to use.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
2c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
20 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DTD_BROWSE 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE 93 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 8f Opens the XML Filter output window, where the XML source of the selected document is displayed. The document is used to test the import filter.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 51 Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
e .uno%3AGallery 59 Opens the Gallery, where you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHANGEPATH 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTODOWNLOAD 90 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 3b Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 1c Continues a paused download.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 1f Installs the downloaded update.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
1b DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
27 DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_TREELISTBOX 7b Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog.
25 DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_MENU_ITEM 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 16 Re-enter the password.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 16 Re-enter the password.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
10 sfx.Edit.2316.28 16 Re-enter the password.
10 sfx.Edit.2316.26 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
2c sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_CONFIRM 16 Re-enter the password.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 38 Click to show or hide the file sharing password options.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
2d sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
43 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ALLOWDUPLICATEFIELDNAMES 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_VISIBLE 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_TRANSITIONEFFECTS 4d Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_BROWSER 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
36 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTNOTES 45 Selects to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTEMPTYPAGES 190 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTBOOKMARKS f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_NONE 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENAB_ACCESS 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_PDFA_1B_SELECT ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_DEFAULT 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
35 filter%3AListBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ALB_FORMSFORMAT 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_INSDEL 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ADDSTREAM 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
40 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_DEFAULT b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTFORMFIELDS 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
3d FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_INITIAL_PAGE 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_HIGHRES 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
43 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_ANY_NOCOPY 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
3a FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_NUM_BOOKMARKLEVELS 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_SINGPG 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
3f FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_VISIBLEBOOKMARKLEVELS 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ACB_PGLY_FIRSTLEFT 101 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_LOSSLESSCOMPRESSION 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_FILLFORM 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_NONE 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
39 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIND 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_LOWRES 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_OPNFULL 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
40 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_COMMENT 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_JPEGCOMPRESSION ca Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_THUMBS 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIDTH 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_OUTLINE 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
40 filter%3AComboBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACO_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_DISPDOCTITLE 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVTOOLBAR 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_RESINIT 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EMBEDSTANDARDFONTS fd Normally the 14 standard Postscript fonts are not embedded in a PDF file, because every PDF reader software already contains these fonts. Enable this option to embed the standard fonts that are installed on your system and that are used in the document.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_DEFAULT 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
2c filter%3AEdit%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3AED_PAGES 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_CNV_OOO_DOCTOPDF d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
33 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_RANGE 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_PAGEONLY 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
31 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_ALL 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
37 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_SELECTION 1e Exports the current selection.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_CNTRWIN 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_EXP_BMRK_TO_DEST 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
38 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONT 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
3b FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_ALLBOOKMARKLEVELS 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
33 FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_RB_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
35 filter%3AMetricField%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ANF_QUALITY 2d Enter the quality level for JPEG compression.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_TAGGEDPDF 47 Selects to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVMENUBAR 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVWINCTRL 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
38 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENDAB_COPY 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONTFAC 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_ENAB_RELLINKFSYS 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
34 filter%3APushButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ABTN_PWD 35 Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords.
34 FILTER_METRICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
42 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_APPLICATION c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF a6 Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME f Enter the name.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 1f Declares the item as read-only.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 1e Declares the item as relevant.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f2 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The sematics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 66 Prema na icona Imprimir para imprimir o documento activo coa configuración de impresión predefinida.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 168 Debuxa unha curva de Bézier suave. Prema no lugar onde desexa que comece a curva, arrastre, solte e mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexa que remate a curva e prema. Mova o apuntador e prema de novo para engadir un segmento de liña recta á curva. Prema dúas veces para rematar o debuxo da curva. Se o fai no seu punto inicial creará unha forma pechada.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 1c1 Debuxa unha forma chea definida polo arco dun círculo e por unha liña de diámetro. Para debuxar un segmento circular, arrastre un círculo ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado e prema para definir o punto inicial da liña de diámetro. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexa situar o punto final da liña de diámetro e prema. Non é necesario premer no círculo. Para debuxar un segmento elíptico, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled be Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line.
e .uno%3AEllipse d8 Debuxa unha forma oval ao arrastrar o apuntador. Prema no lugar onde desexa debuxar a forma oval e arrastre ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado. Para debuxar un círculo, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
b .uno%3ALine 87 Debuxa unha liña recta ao arrastrar o apuntador. Para restrinxir a liña a 45 graos, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
a .uno%3AArc 156 Debuxa un arco. Para facelo, arrastre unha forma oval ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado e despois prema para definir o punto inicial do arco. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexe situar o punto final e prema. Non é necesario premer na forma oval. Para debuxar un arco baseado nun círculo, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 7d Prema para abrir ou pechar a barra Debuxo, onde pode engadir formas, liñas, texto e textos explicativos ao documento actual.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 12a Debuxa unha liña composta dunha serie de segmentos en liña recta. Arrastre para debuxar un segmento da liña, prema para definir o seu punto final e arrastre para debuxar un novo segmento. Prema dúas veces para rematar o debuxo da liña. Se o fai no seu punto inicial creará unha forma pechada.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 169 Debuxa, desde onde se arrastra, unha liña que remata nun texto explicativo rectangular con dirección horizontal. Para redimensionar un texto explicativo arrastre unha das súas agarradoiras. Para engadirlle texto, prema no seu bordo e escriba ou pegue o texto. Pode arredondalo arrastrando a agarradoira do canto maior cando o apuntador se converte nunha man.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee c4 Insire un texto animado con dirección horizontal. Arrastre un marco de texto e escriba ou pegue o seu texto. Para atribuír o efecto de animación, escolla Formato - Texto -  Animación de texto.
b .uno%3ARect e5 Debuxa un rectángulo ao arrastrar o apuntador. Para debuxar un cadrado, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra. Prema no lugar onde desexa situar un dos cantos do rectángulo e arrastre ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 15d Debuxa unha caixa de texto con dirección vertical ao premer ou arrastrar o cursor. Prema calquera lugar do documento e escriba ou pegue o seu texto. Tamén pode mover o cursor ata o lugar onde desexa engadir o texto, arrastrar unha caixa de texto e escribir ou pegar o texto. Só dispoñíbel cando está activado o soporte para idiomas asiáticos.
f .uno%3ADrawText e9 Debuxa unha caixa de texto co texto en horizontal ao arrastrar. Arrastre unha caixa de texto ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado en calquera lugar do documento e escriba ou pegue o texto. Rode a caixa de texto para obter un texto rodado.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 1aa Debuxa, desde onde se arrastra, unha liña que remata nun texto explicativo rectangular con dirección vertical. Para redimensionar o texto explicativo arrastre unha das súas agarradoiras. Para engadir texto prema o seu bordo e escriba ou pegue o texto. Pode arredondalo arrastrando a agarradoira do canto maior cando o apuntador se converte nunha man. Só dispoñíbel cando está activado o soporte para idiomas asiáticos.
a .uno%3APie 1ab Debuxa unha forma chea definida polo arco dunha forma oval e por dúas liñas de raio. Para debuxar un sector elíptico, arrastre unha forma oval ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado e prema para definir a primeira liña de raio. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexa situar a segunda liña de raio e prema. Non é necesario premer na forma oval. Para debuxar un sector circular, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
11 .uno%3ASpinButton 19 Crea un botón xiratorio.
c .uno%3ALabel 2d Crea un campo para a visualización de texto.
10 .uno%3ATimeField 16 Crea un campo de hora.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 2b Abre a barra de ferramentas Máis Controis.
10 .uno%3AScrollBar 21 Crea unha barra de desprazamento.
12 .uno%3AFileControl 31 Crea un botón que permite seleccionar ficheiros.
b .uno%3AGrid 47 Crea un control de táboa para visualizar unha táboa de base de datos.
b .uno%3AEdit 19 Crea unha caixa de texto.
12 .uno%3AImagebutton 28 Crea un botón que se mostra como imaxe.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 18 Crea botóns de opción.
13 .uno%3AImageControl 52 Crea un control de imaxe. Só pode usarse para engadir imaxes dunha base de datos.
10 .uno%3ADateField 16 Crea un campo de data.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 18 Crea un campo formatado.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 1d Crea caixas de verificación.
f .uno%3AGroupBox 37 Crea un marco para agrupar visualmente varios controis.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 18 Crea un botón de ordes.
13 .uno%3ANumericField 18 Crea un campo numérico.
17 .uno%3AAutoControlFocus 100 Se a opción Foco de control automático está activada, ao abrir o documento selecciónase o primeiro control de formulario. Se está desactivada, selecciónase o texto. A orde de tabulación especificada determina cal é o primeiro control de formulario.
f .uno%3AComboBox 20 Crea unha caixa de combinación.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 18 Crea botóns de opción.
f .uno%3ACombobox 20 Crea unha caixa de combinación.
f .uno%3AGroupbox 37 Crea un marco para agrupar visualmente varios controis.
14 .uno%3ACurrencyField 18 Crea un campo monetario.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 32 Abre a barra de ferramentas Deseño de formulario.
14 .uno%3ANavigationBar 1f Crea unha barra de navegación.
e .uno%3AListBox 19 Crea unha caixa de lista.
d .uno%3AConfig 55 The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
13 .uno%3APatternField 19 Crea un campo de patrón.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 1d Crea caixas de verificación.
11 .uno%3ASpinbutton 19 Crea un botón xiratorio.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de texto.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 42 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de verificación.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo numérico.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 34 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha etiqueta.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo monetario.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 71 Abre un submenú que permite seleccionar un tipo de control para substituír o control seleccionado no documento.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 3b O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón de opción.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de lista.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nun control de imaxe.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón de imaxe.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 30 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo de patrón.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 43 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha selección de ficheiros.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo formatado.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 38 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo de datos.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 41 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de combinación.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 37 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo horario.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Mostrar columnas.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 1f Elimina a columna seleccionada.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 1e Oculta a columna seleccionada.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL 76 Abre un submenú para seleccionar un campo de datos que substitúa o campo de datos seleccionado no control de táboa.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 2e Prema Todo se quere mostrar todas as columnas.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL 57 Abre un submenú para seleccionar un campo de datos e incorporalo no control de táboa.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 8d In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 4e Abre un submenú onde pode seleccionar as columnas que desexa mostrar de novo.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 57 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite editar as propiedades dun control seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 57 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite editar as propiedades dun control seleccionado.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 4a Especifica a entrada da caixa de lista que debe marcarse como predefinida.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 3e Determina a data máis temperá que o usuario pode introducir.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 41 Especifica o valor mínimo dun control de barra de desprazamento.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 1e Estabelece a hora predefinida.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 6a Especifica se as caixas de verificación e os botóns de opción se mostran en 3D (predefinido) ou planos.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE f7 Especifica en "unidades de valor" o tamaño do cursor da barra de desprazamento. Un valor de "Valor máx. de desprazamento" menos "Valor mín. de desprazamento" / 2 resulta nun cursor da barra de desprazamento que ocupa a metade da área de fondo.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5e Se a función de formato estrito está activada (Si), só se aceptan os caracteres permitidos.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 66 Especifica o código de formato do control. Prema no botón ... para seleccionar o código do formato.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 36 Pode introducir os datos herdados polo control oculto.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 7a Especifica se os elementos de posicionamento deben mostrarse ou ocultarse no control seleccionado na barra de navegación.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 5b Especifica se as iconas da barra de navegación seleccionada deben ser grandes ou pequenas.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 9f On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 83 A propiedade Orde de tabulación determina a orde seguida no formulario para enfocar os controis ao premer na tecla de tabulación.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 21 Determines spin button intervals.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 77 Especifica se os elementos de navegación deben mostrarse ou ocultarse no control seleccionado na barra de navegación.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 59 Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 1e Estabelece a data predefinida.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 93 Especifica se unha caixa de verificación tamén pode representar valores CERO dunha base de datos ligada, á parte dos valores VERDADEIRO e FALSO.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 4c Determina unha hora que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 5f Se o campo de control ten a propiedade "Activado" (Si), o usuario do formulario pode utilizalo.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 6b Especifica o valor que se debe sumar ou subtraer cando o usuario preme na frecha da barra de desprazamento.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 40 Permítelle seleccionar máis dun elemento dunha caixa de lista.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 58 A propiedade Etiqueta define a etiqueta do campo de control que se mostra no formulario.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2f Define o valor predefinido do campo de control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 5b Especifica a cor de bordo dos controis que teñen a propiedade Bordo definida como "plana".
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 63 Determina se o símbolo monetario debe mostrarse antes ou despois do número nos campos monetarios.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 4e Especifica se se desexa mostrar o campo de control na impresión do documento.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 5b A propiedade Tabulación determina se un campo de control pode seleccionarse coa tecla Tab.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 50 Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 105 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 48 Atribúe a función Encher automaticamente a unha caixa de combinación.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 20 Insire un separador de millares.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6f A opción "Si" transforma o campo de control nun botón xiratorio en que se engaden as frechas correspondentes.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 45 Define o número máximo de caracteres que o usuario pode introducir.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2f Define o valor predefinido do campo de control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 13a Especifica se un botón de ordes se comporta como botón de alternancia. Se define Alternar escollendo "Si", poderá alternar entre os estados de control "Seleccionado" e "Non seleccionado" ao premer no botón ou na barra de espazos mentres o control está enfocado. Os botóns "seleccionados" aparecen "premidos".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 7f Especifica se a primeira columna se debe mostrar ou non con etiquetas de filas en que o rexistro actual se marque cunha frecha.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 3b Especifica a altura de fila dun campo de control de táboa.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 59 Determina unha data que non pode ser excedida por ningún valor introducido polo usuario.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 4e Pode introducir un carácter ou cadea de caracteres para o símbolo monetario.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 47 Engade á caixa de texto o tipo de barra de desprazamento especificada.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 5b Especifica se se ocultan as seleccións de texto cando os controis xa non están enfocados.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 41 Here, you can determine the format you want for the date readout.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4e Especifica a opción de aliñamento do texto ou das imaxes usadas nun control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 63 A propiedade Imaxes especifica o nome do ficheiro e o camiño da imaxe que quere exhibir no botón.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 62 Especifica a cor dos símbolos dos controis, por exemplo, as frechas dunha barra de desprazamento.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 47 Engade á caixa de texto o tipo de barra de desprazamento especificada.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 41 Especifica o valor máximo dun control de barra de desprazamento.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 7d Especifica unha etiqueta de lote en URL que se refire a un documento de axuda e que pode abrirse mediante o campo de control.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Especifica información adicional ou un texto descritivo do campo de control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 67 A propiedade Botón predefinido especifica que se activará o botón correspondente ao premer en Intro.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 3a Redimensiona a imaxe para adecuala ao tamaño do control..
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3c Especifica o atraso en milisegundos entre eventos repetidos.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2f Define o valor predefinido do campo de control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 58 Determina se o bordo do campo debe mostrarse "Sen marco", con "Aparencia 3D" ou "Plano".
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 35 Define o valor predefinido da barra de desprazamento.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 47 Engade á caixa de texto o tipo de barra de desprazamento especificada.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 58 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 51 Se define esta opción escollendo "Si", enfócase o botón da orde ao premer nel.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 60 Define un valor para o campo de control que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5a Ofrece a opción de introducir un texto de axuda que se mostra como suxestión no control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 80 Especifica se se repite a acción dun control, como un botón xiratorio, ao premer no control e manter premido o botón do rato.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 52 A propiedade Acción determina a acción que se debe iniciar ao activar un botón.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE 102 Permítelle usar quebras de liña e formatados nun campo de control como, por exemplo, as caixas de texto ou as etiquetas. Para introducir manualmente unha quebra de liña, prema Intro. Seleccione "Multiliña con formatado" para introducir o texto formatado.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4e Especifica a opción de aliñamento do texto ou das imaxes usadas nun control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 5b Especifica se a barra de navegación debe mostrarse no bordo inferior do control da táboa.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 60 Define un valor para o campo de control que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 6b Especifica o valor que se debe sumar ou subtraer cando o usuario preme na frecha da barra de desprazamento.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 8d Define a máscara de edición. Ao especificar un código de carácter pódese determinar o que pode introducir o usuario no campo de control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE 102 Permítelle usar quebras de liña e formatados nun campo de control como, por exemplo, as caixas de texto ou as etiquetas. Para introducir manualmente unha quebra de liña, prema Intro. Seleccione "Multiliña con formatado" para introducir o texto formatado.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR ba Se a caixa de texto se usa como entrada de contrasinal, introduza o código ASCII do carácter de visualización. Ese carácter mostrarase en lugar dos caracteres tecleados polo usuario.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 73 Especifica se os elementos de acción deben mostrarse ou ocultarse no control seleccionado na barra de navegación.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 60 Define un valor para o campo de control que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2a Define a cor de fondo do campo de control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 38 Determina a hora mínima que pode introducir un usuario.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 3e Pode definir o formato desexado para a visualización da hora.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Especifica o tipo de letra da etiqueta do control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 81 Nos campos de texto seleccione o código de fin de liña que se vai utilizar ao escribir un texto nunha columna de base de datos.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 46 Determina o número de díxitos mostrados á dereita do punto decimal.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL 105 Ao deseñar o seu formulario pode definir a propiedade "Proposta de filtro" para cada caixa de texto do separador Datos da caixa de diálogo Propiedades correspondente. Nas seguintes buscas en modo filtro, pode utilizar toda a información contida neses campos.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 4f Especifica o campo da táboa da fonte de datos ao cal fai referencia o control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL c9 Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE f3 Pode introducir un valor referencial para o formulario web. Ese valor remitirase ao servidor cando se envíe o formulario. Nos formularios de base de datos, o valor introducido grávase no campo da base de datos atribuído ao campo de control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 5c Seleccione o modo de ligazón das caixas de lista coas celas ligadas nas follas de cálculo.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 8a Especifica a referencia a unha cela ligada nunha folla de cálculo. O contido ou estado activo do control está ligado ao contido da cela.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 5b Determina os datos con que se deben encher as listas nas caixas de combinación e de lista.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE d8 En formularios de bases de datos, especifica a fonte de datos do contido de lista do elemento de formulario. Este campo pode usarse para definir unha lista de valores para documentos sen conexión con bases de datos.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 79 Introduza un intervalo de celas que conteña as entradas dunha caixa de lista ou de combinación dunha folla de cálculo.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN cf Use un índice para especificar o campo da táboa ou a consulta SQL da táboa que desexa ligar ao campo fornecido en Campo de datos. Os valores válidos para esta propiedade son 1, 2, 3 e así sucesivamente.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 67 O evento Modificado acontece cando se modifica o contido do control tras deixar de estar este enfocado.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 49 O evento Rato dentro acontece se o rato está dentro do campo de control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 55 O evento Ao perder o foco acontece cando un campo de control deixa de estar enfocado.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 48 O evento Ao recibir o foco acontece cando se enfoca un campo de control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 5d O evento Texto modificado acontece se se introduce ou modifica un texto nun campo de entrada.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 50 O evento Estado modificado acontece se se modifica o estado do campo de control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 4a O evento Rato fóra acontece cando o rato está fóra do campo de control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 76 O evento Botón do rato premido acontece ao premer o botón do rato mentres o apuntador está situado sobre o control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 45 O evento Movemento do rato acontece ao mover o rato sobre o control..
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 66 O evento Tecla premida acontece cando o usuario preme calquera tecla mentres o control está enfocado.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 78 O evento Botón do rato liberado acontece ao liberar o botón do rato mentres o apuntador está situado sobre o control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 72 Nesta caixa de diálogo pode especificar, entre outras cousas, a fonte de datos e os eventos de todo o formulario.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 3d Especifica o tipo de codificación da transferencia de datos.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 4d Especifica o método para transferir a información do formulario completado.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 62 O evento Antes de modificar o rexistro acontece antes de modificar o apuntador do rexistro actual.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 49 O evento Antes de enviar acontece antes de enviar os datos do formulario.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 70 O evento Encher parámetros acontece cando o formulario que se vai cargar posúe parámetros que deben encherse.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 4e O evento Ao recargar acontece inmediatamente despois de recargar o formulario.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 4d O evento Despois de restaurar acontece despois de restabelecer un formulario.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 5e O evento Confirmar eliminación acontece no momento en que se eliminan os datos do formulario.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 6e O evento Despois de actualizar acontece despois de gravar na fonte de datos o control modificado polo usuario.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 67 O evento Despois da acción no rexistro acontece inmediatamente despois de modificar o rexistro actual.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 75 O evento Despois de modificar o rexistro acontece inmediatamente despois de modificar o apuntador do rexistro actual.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 43 O evento Antes de recargar acontece antes de recargar o formulario.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 49 O evento Antes de restaurar acontece antes de restabelecer un formulario.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 84 O evento Ao descargar acontece imediatamente despois de descargar o formulario, ou sexa, despois de separalo da súa fonte de datos.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 78 O evento Antes de descargar acontece antes de descargar o formulario, ou sexa, antes de separalo da súa fonte de datos.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 4a O evento Ao cargar acontece inmediatamente despois de cargar o formulario.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 54 O evento Antes da acción no rexistro acontece antes de modificar o rexistro actual.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 29 Determina se é posíbel modificar datos.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 58 Especifica se poden usarse as funcións de navegación da barra de formularios inferior.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 6e Determina se o formulario só permite incluír datos novos (Si) ou se tamén permite outras propiedades (Non).
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 87 Se crea un subformulario, introduza o campo de datos do formulario superior responsábel da sincronización entre el e o subformulario.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 41 Determina como facer a navegación usando a tecla de tabulación.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 2b Determina se é posíbel eliminar os datos.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 27 Determina se é posíbel engadir datos.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 7e Se crea un subformulario, introduza a variábel onde se poidan almacenar os valores posíbeis do campo do formulario superior.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 41 Define a fonte de datos a que debe facer referencia o formulario.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA a2 Especifica as condicións para ordenar os datos no formulario. A especificación das condicións de ordenación segue as regras SQL sen usar a cláusula ORDER BY.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fc Determina que contido debe utilizarse para o formulario. Pode ser unha táboa ou consulta previamente creada na base de datos ou pode definirse mediante unha instrución SQL. Antes de introducir un contido debe definir o tipo exacto en Tipo de contido.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 94 Define se a fonte de datos vai ser unha táboa ou consulta existente na base de datos ou se o formulario vai xerarse a partir dunha instrución SQL.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
15 HID_TABORDER_CONTROLS 7b Lista os controis do formulario, que se poden seleccionar coa tecla de tabulación na orde especificada de arriba a abaixo.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 83 A caixa de diálogo Orde de tabulación permite modificar a orde de enfoque dos campos de control ao premer a tecla de tabulación.
f .uno%3AAddField 52 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode be Activa ou desactiva o modo deseño. Esta función úsase para alternar rapidamente entre os modos deseño e usuario. Actívea para editar os controis de formulario e desactívea para usalos.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode be Activa ou desactiva o modo deseño. Esta función úsase para alternar rapidamente entre os modos deseño e usuario. Actívea para editar os controis de formulario e desactívea para usalos.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN a6 Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 8f Engade novos elementos ao formulario. A función Engadir só pode seleccionarse se hai un formulario seleccionado no Explorador de formularios.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 78 O Explorador de formularios contén unha lista dos formularios creados (lóxicos) cos campos de control correspondentes.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 3d Abre a caixa de diálogo Propiedades da entrada seleccionada.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 7f Abre o Explorador de formularios, que mostra os formularios e subformularios do documento actual cos seus respectivos controis.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1f Renomea o obxecto seleccionado.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1f Elimina a entrada seleccionada.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3e Abre os formularios en modo deseño para que se poidan editar.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 59 Especifica se o asistente debe iniciarse de forma automática ao inserir un novo control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 73 Especifica se a xanela Estilos e formatado debe mostrarse ou ocultarse. Nela atribúense e organízanse os estilos.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 54 Atribúe un estilo ao parágrafo actual e aos obxectos ou parágrafos seleccionados.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 54 Atribúe un estilo ao parágrafo actual e aos obxectos ou parágrafos seleccionados.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 54 Atribúe un estilo ao parágrafo actual e aos obxectos ou parágrafos seleccionados.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 58 Permítelle seleccionar un nome de tipo de letra na lista ou introducir un directamente.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 6f Permítelle introducir un tamaño de tipo de letra ou escoller entre os diferentes tamaños presentes na lista.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2c Especifica a dirección horizontal do texto.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2a Especifica a dirección vertical do texto.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 99 Prema na icona Reducir sangría para reducir a sangría esquerda do contido da cela ou do parágrafo e estabelecela na posición de tabulación anterior.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 90 Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 119 Aplica a cor de realce actual ao fondo dunha selección de texto. Se non hai texto seleccionado, prema na icona Realce, seleccione o texto que desexa realzar e prema de novo na icona. Para cambiar a cor de realce, prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona e despois na cor desexada.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ab Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 65 Para aumentar o espazamento superior do parágrafo seleccionado, prema na icona Aumentar espazamento.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 65 Para diminuír o espazamento superior do parágrafo seleccionado, prema na icona Reducir espazamento.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 78 Premendo na icona Bordos aparece a barra de ferramentas onde pode modificar o bordo dun obxecto ou da área dunha folla.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 78 Prema nesta icona para abrir a barra de ferramentas Estilo de liña, a cal permite modificar o estilo de liña do bordo.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Prema na icona Cor de liña (do bordo) para abrir a barra de ferramentas Cor de bordo, que permite cambiar a cor do bordo dun obxecto.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 6c Abre unha barra de ferramentas que contén funcións para a optimización das filas e columnas dunha táboa.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 80 Abre a barra de ferramentas Puntas de frecha. Use os símbolos mostrados para definir o estilo do extremo da liña seleccionada.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Roda o obxecto seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 32 Modifica o aliñamento dos obxectos seleccionados.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 5c Baixa o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 5c Baixa o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 5b Sobe o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 5b Sobe o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 3b Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado antes do situado sobre el.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 3b Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado antes do situado sobre el.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 40 Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado despois do situado debaixo del.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 40 Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado despois do situado debaixo del.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 4d Atribúe viñetas aos parágrafos seleccionados ou elimínallas se as teñen.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 9f Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
a SID_RELOAD 3c Substitúe o documento actual pola última versión gardada.
d .uno%3AReload 3c Substitúe o documento actual pola última versión gardada.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE e9 Para activar un cursor de selección en textos só de lectura ou na Axuda, escolla Editar - Seleccionar texto ou abra o menú de contexto dun documento só de lectura e escolla Seleccionar texto. O cursor de selección non pestanexa.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 49 Permítelle editar documentos só de lectura ou táboas de base de datos.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode e9 Para activar un cursor de selección en textos só de lectura ou na Axuda, escolla Editar - Seleccionar texto ou abra o menú de contexto dun documento só de lectura e escolla Seleccionar texto. O cursor de selección non pestanexa.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3f Activa ou desactiva o modo edición da táboa de base de datos.
b .uno%3AStop 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 66 Exporta o documento directamente como PDF. Non se mostra ningunha caixa de diálogo de configuración.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Exhibe información sobre o documento activo de %PRODUCTNAMEBasic.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 83 Mostra a posición do cursor no documento de %PRODUCTNAME Basic. Especifícase o número da fila e, a seguir, o número da columna.
1a SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_NAME 32 Atribúe un nome a un ficheiro ou URL da internet.
19 SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL 47 Permítelle escribir un URL ou arrastralo e soltalo desde un documento.
13 .uno%3ASetHyperlink 35 Insire no documento unha hiperligazón do URL actual.
1c SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_TARGET 3a Especifica o tipo de marco de destino do URL especificado.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 25 Pecha a caixa de diálogo sen gardar.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 46 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite crear e editar hiperligazóns.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 40 Restabelece o estado orixinal das entradas da caixa de diálogo.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 36 Seleccione o tipo de hiperligazón que desexa inserir.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 1d Aplica os datos ao documento.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 1c Crea unha hiperligazón FTP.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 45 Insire o destino no campo Destino da caixa de diálogo Hiperligazón.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 63 Tras introducir a hiperligazón, prema Pechar para definir a ligazón e saír da caixa de diálogo.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1d Crea unha hiperligazón http.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 35 Abre un explorador da web para cargar o URL desexado.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 44 Permítelle iniciar a sesión no enderezo FTP como usuario anónimo.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 40 Especifica a posición no documento de destino á cal desexa ir.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 46 Especifica o nome de inicio de sesión, se traballa con enderezos FTP.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1d Crea unha hiperligazón http.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 38 Especifica o contrasinal, se traballa con enderezos FTP.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 6c Especifica o URL completo do destinatario, no formato mailto:nome@fornecedor.com ou news:grupo.servidor.com.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 24 Especifica o asunto da nova mensaxe.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 49 Atribúe o enderezo de correo electrónico especificado á hiperligazón.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 32 Atribúe un enderezo de noticias á hiperligazón.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 49 Atribúe o enderezo de correo electrónico especificado á hiperligazón.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
d .uno%3APageUp 27 Volve á páxina anterior do documento.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 27 Volve á páxina anterior do documento.
f .uno%3APageDown 25 Vai á seguinte páxina do documento.
f .uno%3ANextPage 25 Vai á seguinte páxina do documento.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 30 Desprázase ata a primeira páxina do documento.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 30 Desprázase ata a primeira páxina do documento.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 2f Desprázase ata a última páxina do documento.
f .uno%3ALastPage 2f Desprázase ata a última páxina do documento.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 37 Abre a base de datos seleccionada para a súa edición.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 68 Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 49 Cancela a configuración de filtro e exhibe todos os rexistros da táboa.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 4d Reconstrúe a visualización da táboa despois de modificar a súa estrutura.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Actualiza os datos mostrados.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 49 Insire na posición do cursor os campos do rexistro marcado no documento.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_COLNMS 63 Utiliza os nomes de campo da táboa de base de datos como títulos das columnas da táboa de texto.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TBL_DB_COLUMN 50 Especifica as columnas da base de datos que se deben inserir na táboa de texto.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_TO 44 Move o campo seleccionado ata a caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_FROM 44 Elimina o campo seleccionado da caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TABLE 5b Insire no documento datos en forma de táboa seleccionados do explorador de fonte de datos.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_EMPTY 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ACB_TABLE_HEADON 53 Especifica se debe inserirse unha liña de título nas columnas da táboa de texto.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_DB 24 Acepta os formatos da base de datos.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_TO 50 Move os campos listados da base de datos á caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_AUTOFMT 93 Abre a caixa de diálogo Formato automático, que permite seleccionar estilos de formato que se aplican inmediatamente despois de inserir a táboa.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_FROM 50 Elimina todos os campos de base de datos da caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_FORMAT 8f Abre a caixa de diálogo Formato de táboa, que permite a definición das propiedades da táboa, isto é, bordos, fondo e largura das columnas.
37 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 6a Especifica un formato da lista se non se acepta a información de formato de determinados campos de datos.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 6a Especifica un formato da lista se non se acepta a información de formato de determinados campos de datos.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TABLE_COL 44 Lista as columnas da base de datos que deben inserirse no documento.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TEXT 56 Insire como texto no documento os datos seleccionados no explorador da fonte de datos.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 51 Actualiza o contido dos campos da base de datos por medio dos rexistros marcados.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 51 Actualiza o contido dos campos da base de datos por medio dos rexistros marcados.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Permite definir as opcións de filtraxe.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Permite definir as opcións de filtraxe.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD3 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL2 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD1 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND1 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL3 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL1 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND3 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP2 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD2 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND2 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP1 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 47 Especifica os criterios de ordenación para a visualización dos datos.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 47 Especifica os criterios de ordenación para a visualización dos datos.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3d Introduza na caixa o termo de busca ou seleccióneo na lista.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 56 Especifica que durante a busca se teñan en conta as letras maiúsculas e minúsculas.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 61 Pecha a caixa de diálogo. A configuración da última busca gárdase ata que peche %PRODUCTNAME.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1a Inicia ou cancela a busca.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 43 Especifica a relación entre o termo de busca e o contido do campo.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 22 Busca nun campo de datos concreto.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 31 Busca en táboas de bases de datos e formularios.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 3b Indica o formulario lóxico en que desexa realizar a busca.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 2d Indica que se van localizar campos sen datos.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 22 Busca nun campo de datos concreto.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 2d Indica que se van localizar campos con datos.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 5e Especifica que a busca se realiza na dirección inversa, do último rexistro cara ao primeiro.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 6d Reinicia a busca. As buscas cara a adiante recomezan no primeiro rexistro e as cara a atrás fano no último.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 5e Especifica que se teñen en conta os formatos de campo ao efectuar buscas no documento actual.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 19 Busca en todos os campos.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 24 Permite buscar cos comodíns * ou ?.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3d Introduza na caixa o termo de busca ou seleccióneo na lista.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 60 Solicita ao servidor da base de datos que filtre os datos visíbeis cos criterios especificados.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 41 Alterna entre a visualización filtrada e non-filtrada da táboa.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 5b Activa unha visualización de táboa adicional cando está en visualización de formulario.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 4b Mostra a táboa ligada ao documento actual no explorador da fonte de datos.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 4b Mostra a táboa ligada ao documento actual no explorador da fonte de datos.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 2c Executa a consulta SQL e mostra o resultado.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 35 Elimina a consulta e as táboas da xanela de deseño.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 40 Especifica as táboas que se deben engadir na xanela de deseño.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 2a Pecha a caixa de diálogo Engadir táboas.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 13 Shows only queries.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 12 Shows only tables.
f .uno%3AAddTable 40 Especifica as táboas que se deben engadir na xanela de deseño.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 1d Insire a táboa seleccionada.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 47 Mostra a visualización de deseño ou a visualización SQL da consulta.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 7e En modo SQL nativo é posíbel introducir ordes SQL que $[officename] non interpreta e que van directamente á fonte de datos.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 66 Mostra a fila "Función" na parte inferior da visualización de deseño da xanela Deseño de consulta.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 47 Mostra a fila "Táboa" na parte inferior da xanela Deseño de consulta.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 47 Mostra a fila "Alcume" na parte inferior da xanela Deseño de consulta.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 62 Expande, por medio do parámetro DISTINCT, a instrución Select da consulta SQL na columna actual.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 7d Mostra o texto fonte do documento HTML. Para ver a fonte HTML de novos documentos ten antes que gardalos como documento HTML.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 7d Mostra o texto fonte do documento HTML. Para ver a fonte HTML de novos documentos ten antes que gardalos como documento HTML.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 92 Mostra o estilo de páxina actual. Prema dúas veces para editar o estilo ou prema co botón dereito do rato para seleccionar un estilo diferente.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 92 Mostra o estilo de páxina actual. Prema dúas veces para editar o estilo ou prema co botón dereito do rato para seleccionar un estilo diferente.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 92 Mostra o estilo de páxina actual. Prema dúas veces para editar o estilo ou prema co botón dereito do rato para seleccionar un estilo diferente.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 39 Especifica o factor de zoom da visualización da páxina.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 7b Displays the current selection mode. You can switch between STD = Standard, EXT = Extend, ADD = Add, BLK = Block selection.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 7b Displays the current selection mode. You can switch between STD = Standard, EXT = Extend, ADD = Add, BLK = Block selection.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 15 Mostra a hora actual.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 15 Mostra a data actual.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 70 Esta icona da barra Imaxe abre a barra Filtro gráfico, onde pode utilizar varios filtros na imaxe seleccionada.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 3c Especifica o número de cores a que se debe reducir a imaxe.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 33 Mellora ou aumenta a nitidez dos bordos do obxecto.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 28 Define a largura das pezas dos mosaicos.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize cd Abre unha caixa de diálogo para definir a solarización. A solarización é un efecto semellante ao que acontece cando hai exceso de luz durante o revelado fotográfico. As cores invértense parcialmente.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 31 Mostra unha caixa de diálogo para crear relevos.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 8e Inverte os valores da cor dunha imaxe en cor ou os de brillo dunha imaxe en escala de grises. Aplique o filtro de novo para reverter o efecto.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 6b Mostra a imaxe como un debuxo a carbón. Os contornos debúxanse en negro e as cores orixinais suprímense.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 48 Asocia pequenos grupos de píxeles en áreas rectangulares da mesma cor.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 28 Elimina ruido aplicando un filtro medio.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 4a Abre unha caixa de diálogo para determinar o número de cores do póster.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 27 Define a altura das pezas dos mosaicos.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia ac Todos os píxeles están definidos para valores de gris e as canles de cor verde e azul están reducidas a cantidade que espefique. A canle de cor vermella non se modifica.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 32 Especifica tamén para inverter todos os píxeles.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 31 Aumenta a imaxe aplicando un filtro de paso alto.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 3c Suaviza ou esfuma a imaxe aplicando un filtro de paso baixo.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Especifica o nivel de brillo, en porcentaxe, por riba do cal deben solarizarse os píxeles.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 28 Converte unha imaxe nun formato pop art.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 99 Define a intensidade de envellecemento en porcentaxe. Ao 0% verá os valores de gris de todos os píxeles. Ao 100% só permanece a canle de cor vermella.
f .uno%3AGrafMode ad Lista os atributos de visualización do obxecto gráfico seleccionado. O obxecto gráfico incorporado ou ligado ao ficheiro non se modifica, só a visualización do obxecto.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 55 Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 57 Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4f Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 35 Especifica o brillo do obxecto gráfico seleccionado.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 48 Especifica o contraste da visualización da imaxe gráfica seleccionada.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 55 Abre a barra de ferramentas Formas básicas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 54 Abre a barra de ferramentas Frechas largas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 66 Abre a barra de ferramentas Textos explicativos, que permite inserir elementos gráficos no documento.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 57 A barra de ferramentas Cor permite editar algunhas propiedades do obxecto seleccionado.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 54 Abre a barra de ferramentas Frechas largas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 4d Abre a Galería de Fontwork, que permite inserir texto gráfico no documento.
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 93 First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 4f Abre a barra de ferramentas Símbolos, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 4f Abre a barra de ferramentas Símbolos, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL 6a O panel de navegación da xanela da Axuda contén os separadores Contido, Índice, Localizar e Marcadores.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 22 Engade esta páxina aos marcadores
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 51 Introduza o texto que desexa buscar ou seleccione unha entrada de texto da lista.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX 66 Na caixa de lista situada na parte superior pode seleccionar outros módulos da Axuda de %PRODUCTNAME.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 30 Localiza a seguinte ocorrencia do termo buscado.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 2d Ofrece unha visión xeral do sistema da Axuda
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 37 Busca cara a atrás desde a posición actual do cursor.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 26 Mostra e oculta o panel de navegación
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 18 Imprime a páxina actual
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 20 Só localiza palabras completas.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 3c Distingue entre texto en maiúsculas e texto en minúsculas.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 19 Volve á páxina anterior
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 31 Abre a caixa de diálogo Localizar nesta páxina.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND 47 Busca en toda a páxina da Axuda, comeza na posición actual do cursor.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 1a Avanza á seguinte páxina
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 2f Vai á primeira páxina do tema actual da Axuda
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 57 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións importantes para o control do sistema da Axuda
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 54 Prema dúas veces nunha entrada ou teclee a palabra que desexa localizar no índice.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 23 Prema para ver o tema seleccionado.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 7d Lista os títulos das páxinas localizadas na Busca en todo o texto. Para ver unha páxina prema dúas veces na súa entrada.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 27 Mostra a entrada seleccionada da lista.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 2b Prema para iniciar a busca en todo o texto.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 58 Introduza aquí o termo de busca. A busca non distingue entre maiúsculas e minúsculas.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS 6b Especifica se vai realizarse unha busca exacta da palabra inserida. Non se localizarán partes de palabras.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 4b Especifica se a busca dun termo se realiza só nos títulos dos documentos.
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 25 exhibe o asunto seleccionado da Axuda
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 1f elimina o marcador seleccionado
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE 58 Mostra o nome da páxina marcada. Se o desexa pode teclear un novo nome para o marcador.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 46 abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode atribuír outro nome ao marcador
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS 95 Ao premer na tecla Intro ou dúas veces sobre un marcador ábrese a páxina asignada. Se preme no botón dereito do rato ábrese o menú de contexto.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS 6e Mostra os temas principais da axuda, organizados de maneira semellante aos cartafoles dun xestor de ficheiros.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 39 Inclina cinco graos cara a arriba o obxecto seleccionado.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 29 Abre a xanela Iluminación de extrusión.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 2e Abre a barra de ferramentas Cor de extrusión.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 3b Inclina cinco graos cara á dereita o obxecto seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 3c Inclina cinco graos cara á esquerda o obxecto seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 39 Inclina cinco graos cara a abaixo o obxecto seleccionado.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 27 Abre a xanela Superficie de extrusión.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 3a Activa/desactiva os efectos 3D dos obxectos seleccionados.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 2a Introduza unha profundidade de extrusión.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 27 Abre a xanela Dirección de extrusión.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 29 Abre a xanela Profundidade de extrusión.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 1b Seleccione unha dirección.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 58 Guíano na creación de cartas comerciais e persoais, fax, axendas, presentacións, etc.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 27 Inicia o asistente de modelos de carta.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 32 Mostra as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 32 Mostra as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 27 Inicia o asistente de modelos de carta.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 74 O asistente crea un novo modelo de documento a partir das opcións seleccionadas e despois gárdao no disco ríxido.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 32 Mostra as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER a2 Especifica se vai usarse papel con logotipos impresos, enderezos ou liñas de pés de páxina. O asistente mostra a seguir a páxina de deseño do papel timbrado.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 2f Especifica que se vai crear unha carta persoal.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 39 Especifica que se vai crear un modelo de carta comercial.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 36 Especifica que se vai crear unha carta persoal formal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 3b Especifica se se vai crear unha carta persoal ou comercial.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 4d Define a distancia entre o logotipo e a marxes esquerda e dereita da páxina.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6c Especifica que xa hai un pé de páxina impreso no papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime pés de páxina.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 1c Define a altura do logotipo.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 67 Especifica que xa hai un logotipo impreso no seu papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime ningún logo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 4f Define a distancia entre o logotipo e as marxes superior e inferior da páxina.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 74 Introduza a altura da área do pé de páxina xa impreso no seu papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime nesa área.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 1d Define a largura do logotipo.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER a7 Especifica que o enderezo xa está impreso en tamaño reducido por enriba da área do enderezo do destinatario. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime enderezos en tamaño reducido.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 1d Define a largura do logotipo.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 45 Permítelle especificar os elementos presentes no seu papel timbrado.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 66 Especifica a existencia dun enderezo xa impreso no papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime enderezos.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 4d Define a distancia entre o logotipo e a marxes esquerda e dereita da páxina.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 4f Define a distancia entre o logotipo e as marxes superior e inferior da páxina.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 1c Define a altura do logotipo.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Inclúe un enderezo de remite en pequeno no modelo de carta.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 2d Inclúe un pé de páxina no modelo de carta.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 45 Inclúe un saúdo no modelo de carta, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Inclúe un logotipo no modelo de carta.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTLETTERNORM 3b Seleccione un país para usar un deseño de carta adecuado.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 30 Inclúe unha liña de asunto no modelo de carta.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4d Inclúe unha liña con referencias a unha carta comercial no modelo de carta.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 2a Define o texto e a posición do remitente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 45 Inclúe un saúdo no modelo de carta, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Inclúe marcas de dobra no modelo de carta.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 53 Inclúe unha frase de despedida no modelo de carta. Selecciónea na caixa de lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 53 Inclúe unha frase de despedida no modelo de carta. Selecciónea na caixa de lista.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 2d Especifica os datos de enderezo do remitente.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 2d Especifica os datos de enderezo do remitente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 1f Especifica o nome do remitente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 52 Especifica que se insiran os campos de marcadores de posición no modelo de carta.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Especifica o enderezo da rúa do remitente.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Define os datos do destinatario e do remitente.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 46 Os campos de base de datos de enderezos insírense no modelo de carta.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Utiliza os datos de enderezo das seguintes caixas de texto.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 4d Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 2d Especifica os datos de enderezo do remitente.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 4b Seleccione esta opción para suprimir o pé de páxina da primeira páxina.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 2f Introduza o texto das liñas de pé de páxina.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 48 Especifica os elementos que se van incluír no espazo do pé de páxina.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 60 Marque esta caixa de verificación se desexa incluír os números de páxina no modelo de carta.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 5d Introduza o camiño e o nome do ficheiro do modelo ou prema no botón ... para seleccionalos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 59 Garda e pecha o modelo e, a seguir, abre un novo documento sen título baseado no modelo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 5d Introduza o camiño e o nome do ficheiro do modelo ou prema no botón ... para seleccionalos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2c Especifica o título do modelo de documento.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 2d Garda o modelo e manteno aberto para editalo.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 38 Especifica onde e baixo que nome se vai gardar o modelo.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE bd O asistente crea un modelo de documento a partir das opcións seleccionadas e gárdao. Móstrase na área de traballo un novo documento baseado no modelo, co nome de ficheiro "SentítuloX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 7e O asistente garda a configuración e avanza á seguinte páxina. O botón Seguinte fica inactivo ao chegar á última páxina.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK b1 Prema no botón Volver para ver o configurado na páxina anterior. A configuración actual non se modifica nin elimina. Este botón móstrase activo a partir da segunda páxina.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 18 Abre o Asistente de fax.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 18 Abre o Asistente de fax.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 21 Especifica o deseño predefinido.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 28 Define o estilo do seu documento de fax.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 28 Crea un modelo de fax de estilo persoal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 21 Especifica o deseño predefinido.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 2a Crea un modelo de fax de estilo comercial.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 1f Inclúe un logotipo da empresa.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Inclúe unha liña de tipo de mensaxe, selecciónea na caixa de lista.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 1a Inclúe un campo de datos.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Inclúe unha liña de tipo de mensaxe, selecciónea na caixa de lista.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 1a Inclúe un pé de páxina.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 32 Inclúe un saúdo. Seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 2f Especifica os elementos do fax que se imprimen.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 32 Inclúe un saúdo. Seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 1d Inclúe unha liña de asunto.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 40 Especifica a información do remitente e do destinatario do fax.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 67 Insire campos de base de datos para unha posterior combinación de correspondencia co documento de fax.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 72 Insire marcadores de posición para o enderezo no modelo de fax, onde, máis adiante, introducirá os datos reais.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 8b Seleccióneo para introducir os datos de enderezo nas caixas de texto presentes. Os datos insírense como texto normal no documento de fax.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 72 Insire marcadores de posición para o enderezo no modelo de fax, onde, máis adiante, introducirá os datos reais.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 2c Especifica a información do pé de páxina.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 28 Define o nome e localización do modelo.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 3c Inicia o asistente para axudalo a crear un modelo de axenda.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 3c Inicia o asistente para axudalo a crear un modelo de axenda.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 32 Seleccione o deseño de páxina na caixa de lista.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 24 Especifica un deseño para a axenda.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 53 Imprime unha páxina que pode utilizarse para redactar as actas durante a reunión.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 1e Especifica o nome da reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 1e Especifica a data da reunión.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 1f Especifica o sitio de reunión.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3a Especifica a data, hora, nome e localización da reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 1e Especifica a hora da reunión.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 35 Especifica os títulos que desexa incluír na axenda.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 3a Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Lecturas".
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 44 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Material necesario".
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 37 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Notas".
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 42 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Tipo de reunión".
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 32 Especifica os nomes que se van incluír na axenda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 6f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña que permita introducir o nome da persoa que convocou a reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Move cara a abaixo o tema actual.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 21 Move cara a arriba o tema actual.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3c Especifica os temas que desexa imprimir no modelo de axenda.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1f Elimina a liña de tema actual.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 38 Insire unha nova liña baleira de tema enriba da actual.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 41 Crea e garda o modelo de axenda e, a seguir, ábreo para editalo.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 51 Especifique o camiño completo, incluído o nome de ficheiro do modelo de axenda.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 37 Escolla o nome e localización para o modelo de axenda.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5a Crea e garda o modelo de axenda e, a seguir, abre un novo documento de axenda baseado nel.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 26 Especifica o nome do modelo de axenda.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 51 Especifique o camiño completo, incluído o nome de ficheiro do modelo de axenda.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 3d Volve á etapa anterior sen eliminar a configuración actual.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 38 Acepta a nova configuración e pasa á seguinte páxina.
c slot%3A10425 8e Use o asistente para crear presentacións de modo interactivo. Co asistente pode modificar as mostras de modelos segundo as súas necesidades.
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 8e Use o asistente para crear presentacións de modo interactivo. Co asistente pode modificar as mostras de modelos segundo as súas necesidades.
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 8e Use o asistente para crear presentacións de modo interactivo. Co asistente pode modificar as mostras de modelos segundo as súas necesidades.
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 108 Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialog box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 46 Prema en Abrir para ver a caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiro.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 27 Crea unha nova presentación (baleira).
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 41 Lista as categorías de modelo dispoñíbeis para presentacións.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 3a Exhibe unha lista de presentacións creadas anteriormente.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 49 Abre unha caixa de lista que contén varias presentacións modificábeis.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 47 Especifica o tipo de presentación e permítelle seleccionar un modelo.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 41 Lista as categorías de modelo dispoñíbeis para presentacións.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 44 Especifica que se mostren os modelos na xanela de previsualización.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 34 Crea unha presentación para usala como diapositiva.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 35 Crea unha presentación que pode imprimirse en papel.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 36 Crea unha presentación para usala como transparencia.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 30 Utiliza o formato orixinal de páxina do modelo.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 6d Permítelle seleccionar un estilo de diapositiva para a presentación seleccionada na páxina 1 do asistente.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 31 Crea só unha presentación de pantalla completa.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 6d Permítelle seleccionar un estilo de diapositiva para a presentación seleccionada na páxina 1 do asistente.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 6d Permítelle seleccionar un estilo de diapositiva para a presentación seleccionada na páxina 1 do asistente.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1c Determines the effect speed.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 5f Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 2a Specifies an effect for your presentation.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 60 The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 46 Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 2c Defines the pause between each presentation.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 2f Defines the duration of each presentation page.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 23 Especifica o tema da presentación.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 64 Utilice este campo para introducir outras ideas e puntos que lle gustaría abordar na presentación.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 2f Especifica o seu nome e o nome de súa empresa.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 2f Especifica o seu nome e o nome de súa empresa.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 35 Crea un resumo do contido de todas as presentacións.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 35 Crea un resumo do contido de todas as presentacións.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 31 Prema para crear formularios sen máis preguntas.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 33 Activa o asistente para a creación de formularios.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 45 Especifica a táboa ou consulta para a que desexa crear o formulario.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 32 Mostra os campos dispoñíbeis no novo formulario.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 4e Prema para engadir un subformulario baseado nunha selección manual de campos.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 46 Prema para engadir un subformulario baseado nunha relación existente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 37 Seleccione a relación en que se basea o subformulario.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 36 Seleccione esta opción para engadir un subformulario.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Mostra os campos que se van incluír no novo formulario.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 43 Especifica a táboa ou consulta para a que se crea o subformulario.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 24 As etiquetas alíñanse á esquerda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 59 Aliña os campos da base de datos en forma de columnas, coas etiquetas enriba dos campos.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 36 Dispón as etiquetas enriba dos datos correspondentes.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 33 Aliña os campos da base de datos de forma tabular.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 5e Aliña os campos da base de datos en forma de columnas, coas etiquetas á esquerda dos campos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 23 As etiquetas alíñanse á dereita.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 3a Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a edición de datos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 42 Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a inclusión de datos novos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 68 Crea un formulario que pode usarse tanto para mostrar datos existentes como para introducir datos novos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 3e Crea un formulario que só se usa para introducir datos novos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 3e Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a eliminación de datos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 2d Especifica o estilo de páxina do formulario.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2f Especifica que os bordos do campo sexan planos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 3b Especifica que os bordos do campo teñan unha aparencia 3D.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 2b Especifica que os campos non teñan bordos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 44 Garda o formulario e ábreo en modo edición para cambiar o deseño.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 5c Garda o formulario e ábreo como documento de formulario para introducir e visualizar datos.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 20 Especifica o nome do formulario.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 25 Seleccione as propiedades do informe.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 30 Activa o asistente para a creación de informes.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 3f Seleccione a táboa ou consulta para a que vai crear o informe.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 2c Mostra os campos incluídos no novo informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST cb Lista os campos utilizados para agrupar o informe. Para eliminar un nivel do agrupamento, seleccione o nome do campo e, a seguir, prema no botón <-. Pódense seleccionar ata catro niveis de agrupamento.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING d8 Lista os campos seleccionados na páxina anterior do asistente. Para agrupar o informe partindo dun campo, seleccione o nome do campo e, a seguir, prema no botón ->. Pode seleccionar ata catro niveis de agrupamento.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 41 Seleccione o primeiro campo que se usará para ordenar o informe.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT b1 Define un deseño de páxina para o informe. Os deseños de páxina cárganse a partir de ficheiros modelo, que atribúen unha cabeceira, un pé de páxina e o fondo da páxina.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 40 Selecciona unha páxina de orientación vertical para o informe.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 42 Selecciona unha páxina de orientación horizontal para o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 74 Define un conxunto de estilos para o informe. Os estilos atribúen tipos de letra, sangrías, fondos de táboa, etc.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 6a Garda o informe como estático. Se o abre, mostra sempre os mesmos datos que no momento da súa creación.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 3e Se preme en Rematar o modelo gárdase e ábrese para edición.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 48 Especifica o título que se imprime na liña de título de cada páxina.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 4d Garda o informe como modelo. Os informes dinámicos mostran os datos actuais.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 26 Se preme en Rematar o modelo gárdase.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 34 Elimina o deseño seleccionado da lista de deseños.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 77 Carga un deseño existente da lista de deseños e utilízao como punto de partida para os pasos seguintes do asistente.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 34 Crea un deseño nas páxinas seguintes do asistente.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 34 Crea un deseño nas páxinas seguintes do asistente.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 1e Mostra os deseños existentes.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 4c Utilizado pola exportación WebCast para crear páxinas HTML e scripts Perl.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 32 Define o tempo de exhibición de cada diapositiva.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP a5 Se selecciona a opción ASP , a exportación WebCast crea páxinas ASP. Teña en conta que as presentacións HTML só as ofrecen servidores web con soporte para ASP.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 30 Especifica que se mostren tamén as súas notas.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 42 Crea páxinas HTML estándar a partir de páxinas de exportación.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 63 Especifica o URL (absoluto ou relativo) onde se gardou a presentación HTML creada no servidor web.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 45 Especifica o URL (absoluto ou relativo) para as scripts Perl xeradas.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 5c Reinicia automaticamente a presentación HTML despois da exhibición da última diapositiva.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES 9c Crea páxinas HTML estándar con marcos. A páxina exportada sitúase no marco principal e o marco da esquerda mostra un índice en forma de hiperligazóns.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 73 A transición de páxinas faise automaticamente tras o tempo especificado e non depende do contido da presentación
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 99 Crea unha presentación HTML predefinida como unha exportación de quiosco, en que as diapositivas avanzan automaticamente despois dun tempo determinado.
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT dd A transición da diapositiva depende do intervalo que defina na presentación para cada diapositiva. Se define unha transición manual de páxina, a presentación HTML introduce unha nova páxina ao premer calquera tecla.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 42 Crea páxinas HTML estándar a partir de páxinas de exportación.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 5f Especifica o URL (absoluto ou relativo) que debe introducir o usuario para ver a presentación.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 23 Crea unha portada para o documento.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 82 The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 51 Indica que se exportan os ficheiros de son definidos como efectos de transición.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 75 The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors.
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY b4 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 5b Seleccione unha resolución alta para unha visualización de diapositivas de alta calidade.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 4d Seleccione unha resolución media para unha presentación de tamaño mediano.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 80 Seleccione unha resolución baixa para manter o tamaño de ficheiro reducido, mesmo para presentacións con moitas diapositivas.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 46 Especifica o seu sitio web. Insire unha hiperligazón na publicación.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 2b Especifica o nome do autor da publicación.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 2b Especifica o nome do autor da publicación.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 3b Especifica o texto adicional que se vai mostrar na portada.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 2d Especifica o enderezo de correo electrónico.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 31 Insire hiperligazóns de texto en vez de botóns.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 31 Insire hiperligazóns de texto en vez de botóns.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 3b Utiliza as cores predefinidas do explorador web do usuario.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 5c Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor da hiperligazón da presentación.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 54 Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor de fondo da presentación.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 47 Determina as cores a partir dos estilos utilizados no documento actual.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 55 Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor , onde pode seleccionar a cor do texto da presentación.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 60 Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor da ligazón visitada da presentación.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 4e Permite definir as súas propias cores nalgúns dos obxectos da presentación.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 5e Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor da ligazón activa da presentación.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 47 Determina as cores a partir dos estilos utilizados no documento actual.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 5b Converte documentos en formato *.doc de Microsoft Word en documentos *.odt de OpenDocument.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTSODOCUMENTS 51 Converts old binary documents into the OpenDocument format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKCALC 55 Converts documents in the old format of Calc *.sdc into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKMATHGLOBAL 9a Converts documents in the old format of Writer master documents *.sgl into OpenDocument *.odm documents, and Math *.smf into OpenDocument *.odf documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 5a Crea un ficheiro de rexistro no cartafol de traballo que mostra os documentos convertidos.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 5c Converte documentos en formato *.xls de Microsoft Excel en documentos *.ods de OpenDocument.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 5b Converte documentos en formato *.doc de Microsoft Word en documentos *.odt de OpenDocument.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKWRITER 57 Converts documents in the old format of Writer *.sdw into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 61 Converte documentos en formato *.ppt de Microsoft PowerPoint en documentos *.odp de OpenDocument.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKIMPRESS 8a Converts documents in the old format of Draw *.sda into OpenDocument *.odg documents, and Impress *.sdd into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 39 Convértense todas as celas de moeda do documento activo.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 3e Indica o cartafol ou o nome do documento que desexa converter.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 94 Converte en euros os valores monetarios encontrados en documentos de $[officename] Calc e en campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 24 Activa a axuda da caixa de diálogo.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 47 Especifica se incluír todos os subcartafoles do cartafol seleccionado.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Volve á primeira páxina do Conversor de euros.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 31 Especifica a moeda que desexa converter en euros.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 56 Convértense as celas de moeda do intervalo seleccionado antes de activar o conversor.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1a Converte todo o documento.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 94 Converte en euros os valores monetarios encontrados en documentos de $[officename] Calc e en campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 15 Inicia a conversión.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 66 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode seleccionar un cartafol para almacenar os ficheiros convertidos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT c0 Especifica que durante a conversión se desactiva a protección da folla e que se reactiva despois. Se a folla está protexida cun contrasinal, aparece unha caixa de diálogo para introducilo.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 56 Converte valores monetarios de campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 2d Convértense as celas co estilo seleccionado.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 33 Mostra os intervalos da lista que se van converter.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 47 Especifica o cartafol e o camiño onde gardar os ficheiros convertidos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1b Pecha o Conversor de euros.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 4e Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar o cartafol ou documento desexado.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 94 Converte en euros os valores monetarios encontrados en documentos de $[officename] Calc e en campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6d Converte todos os documentos e modelos de $[officename] Calc e $[officename] Writer no cartafol seleccionado.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 2f Convértense as celas de moeda da folla activa.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 4f Select this option if you already use an address book in Seamonkey or Netscape.
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa dispón de datos de enderezos nun servidor LDAP.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
c slot%3A10934 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 46 Estabelece a conexión coa fonte de datos e pecha a caixa de diálogo.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 2c Sae do asistente sen aplicar ningún cambio.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 53 Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook Express.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 61 Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook (not Outlook Express).
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 6b Seleccione esta opción se desexa rexistrar outra fonte de datos como axenda de enderezos en $[officename].
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 47 Abre unha caixa de diálogo en que pode configurar opcións adicionais.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 5b Especifica a táboa que vai servir de axenda de enderezos para os modelos de $[officename].
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 24 Especifica o nome da fonte de datos.
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS fe Rexistra en %PRODUCTNAME o ficheiro de base de datos recén creado. A base de datos inclúese na xanela da fonte de datos (F4). Se esta caixa de verificación está desmarcada, só é posíbel acceder á base de datos abrindo o ficheiro de base de datos.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 47 Especifica a localización mediante unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 47 Especifica a localización mediante unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 33 Abre a Modelos: Atribución de axenda de enderezos.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 4a O Asistente de web axúdao a manter un sitio web nun servidor da internet.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 4a O Asistente de web axúdao a manter un sitio web nun servidor da internet.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 26 Elimina a configuración seleccionada.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7f Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "default".
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 51 Selecccione o formato de ficheiro ao que desexa exportar o ficheiro seleccionado.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 39 Introduza unha descrición para o documento seleccionado.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC dd Opens a dialog where you can select the files that you want to upload to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 34 Introduza o nome do autor do documento seleccionado.
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 91 Introduza o título do documento seleccionado. O título aparece como hiperligazón ao documento seleccionado na páxina de índice do sitio web.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 29 Elimina da lista o ficheiro seleccionado.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS ff Lista os documentos escollidos para seren publicados no sitio web. O asistente pode converter documentos de %PRODUCTNAME en formatos HTML, PDF e, nalgúns casos, a formato Flash, antes de cargalos. Os ficheiros restantes cárganse no seu formato orixinal.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 4a Inclúe a data da última modificación do ficheiro na páxina de índice.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 43 Inclúe os nomes de ficheiros dos documentos na páxina de índice.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 4b Optimiza o sitio web para unha resolución de pantalla de 640x480 píxeles.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 35 Mostra o formato dos ficheiros na páxina de índice.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 44 Mostra o número de páxinas do seu sitio web na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 3c Mostra a icona do formato de ficheiro na páxina de índice.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 46 Inclúe a información de resumo dos documentos na páxina de índice.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 43 Inclúe as datas de creación dos documentos na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 4c Optimiza o sitio web para unha resolución de pantalla de 1024x768 píxeles.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 41 Mostra o tamaño do ficheiro en quilobytes na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 4d Inclúe os nomes das persoas que crearon os documentos na páxina de índice.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 4b Optimiza o sitio web para unha resolución de pantalla de 800x600 píxeles.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 5c Seleccione as iconas que desexa usar para os elementos de navegación da páxina de índice.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 38 Seleccione o esquema de cores para a páxina de índice.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 39 Seleccione unha Imaxe de fondo para a páxina de índice.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 72 Abre unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros para seleccionar un ficheiro de imaxe de fondo para a páxina de índice.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 42 Especifique unha imaxe de fondo para o estilo de Asistente de web.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 2d Limpa a imaxe de fondo da páxina de índice.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 31 Limpa o conxunto de iconas da páxina de índice.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 53 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentation documents in the Web Wizard.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 78 Introduza o enderezo de correo electrónico da páxina de índice. O enderezo está almacenado nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 66 Introduza a data de creación da páxina de índice. A data está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 78 Introduza a nota sobre os dereitos de autor para a páxina de índice. A nota está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 64 Introduza a data modificada da páxina de índice. A data está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 6f Introduza o título da páxina de índice. Este elemento móstrase na barra de título dos exploradores da web.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 6e Introduza unha descrición para a páxina de índice. A descrición está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL ec Carga a páxina de índice e os ficheiros nun cartafol local. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP d3 Carga os ficheiros nun servidor FTP. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL ec Carga a páxina de índice e os ficheiros nun cartafol local. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 39 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar un cartafol.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 74 Abre a caixa de diálogo Conexión FTP, onde pode editar e probar a configuración da conexión para o servidor FTP.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 11c Engade a páxina de índice e os ficheiros a un ficheiro de datos comprimido e carga o ficheiro no sitio web. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 2f Introduza o nome do ficheiro de configuración.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 57 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode especificar a localización do ficheiro de datos.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 37 Garda a configuración que especificou neste asistente.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 4d Abre a páxina web no explorador da web predefinido do seu sistema operativo.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP d3 Carga os ficheiros nun servidor FTP. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 11c Engade a páxina de índice e os ficheiros a un ficheiro de datos comprimido e carga o ficheiro no sitio web. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 5f Introduza a localización dun cartafol no servidor FTP onde desexe almacenar os seus ficheiros.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 69 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode especificar o cartafol do servidor FTP para almacenar os ficheiros.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 30 Proba a conexión FTP coa configuración actual.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3c Teclee o contrasinal necesario para acceder ao servidor FTP.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 50 Edite e probe a configuración de conexión do servidor FTP do Asistente de web.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 40 Teclee o nome de usuario necesario para acceder ao servidor FTP.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2d Teclee o nome ou enderezo IP do servidor FTP.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 66 If you click the cell, you can select among the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 91 Introduza o nome do campo de datos a que fixo referencia na consulta. A configuración estabelecida nas filas inferiores refírese  a este campo.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 41 Especifica os criterios de filtraxe do contido do campo de datos.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 15 Edit Join Properties.
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 53 Introduza o nome do esquema atribuído á consulta ou á visualización de táboas.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 39 Seleccione aquí unha función para executar na consulta.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 49 Aquí móstrase a táboa de base de datos do campo de datos seleccionado.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 32 Seleccione as condicións para definir a consulta.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 90 Especifica un alcume, que se lista nunha consulta en vez do nome de campo. Isto posibilita o uso de etiquetas de columna definidas polo usuario.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 65 Prema dúas veces nos campos para engadilos á consulta. Arrastre e solte para definir as relacións.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 44 Se marca un campo de datos como Visíbel, faise visíbel na consulta
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 3c Introduza o nome de consulta ou de visualización de táboa.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 2d Specifies the link type of the selected link.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 2f Especifica as dúas táboas que desexa asociar.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 2f Especifica as dúas táboas que desexa asociar.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 21 Introduza o contrasinal anterior.
29 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_USER 22 Especifica o nome do novo usuario.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 24 Teclee outra vez o novo contrasinal.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 1d Introduza o novo contrasinal.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Especifica o valor predefinido dos novos rexistros de datos.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 67 Se esta orde presenta unha marca de verificación, o campo de datos desta liña é unha chave primaria.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 1b Especifica o tipo de campo.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 29 Nesta área define a estrutura da táboa.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 1a Mostra os textos de axuda.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Mostra o código de formato que pode seleccionar co botón ... ).
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 36 Este botón abre a caixa de diálogo Formato de campo.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 97 Se a táboa non foi gravada insere unha fila baleira por riba da fila actual . Se a táboa xa está gravada insere unha fila baleira na fin da táboa .
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 93 Especifica o nome do campo de datos. Teña en conta as restricións da base de datos, como o tamaño do nome, os caracteres especiais e os espazos.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 25 Especifica unha descrición opcional.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 57 Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST 85 Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialog.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Deletes the current index.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Renames the current index.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 14 Creates a new index.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 50 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 59 Aquí pode ligar as táboas da base de datos actual por medio de campos de datos comúns.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Permite definir e editar unha relación entre dúas táboas.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 58 Os nomes das táboas seleccionadas para a ligazón aparecen aquí como nomes de columna.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 58 Os nomes das táboas seleccionadas para a ligazón aparecen aquí como nomes de columna.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 27 Define os campos de chave da relación.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 1b Especifica o nome da copia.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 39 Anexa os datos da táboa que desexa copiar noutra táboa.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW d8 Se a base de datos soporta visualizacións, só pode seleccionar esta opción ao copiar unha consulta nun depósito de táboa. Esta opción permítelle ver e editar unha consulta como visualización normal de táboa.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 41 Especifica o nome da chave primaria xerada. Ese nome é opcional.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 40 Só copia a definición da táboa, non os datos correspondentes.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 1e Crea unha copia 1:1 da táboa.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 36 Lista os campos que desexa incluír na táboa copiada.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES bc Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 31 Seleccione o valor predefinido dos campos Si/Non.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3d Lista os campos de datos que se incluirán na táboa copiada.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 24 Activa o recoñecemento automático.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 1c Selecciona un tipo de campo.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 34 Introduza o número de caracteres do campo de datos.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 50 Introduza o número de liñas que desexa usar para o recoñecemento automático.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 34 Introduza o número de caracteres do campo de datos.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 83 Introduza o número de decimais do campo de datos. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para campos de datos numéricos ou decimais.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 58 Mostra o nome do campo de datos seleccionado. Se o desexa, pode introducir un novo nome.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 2d Selecciona todos os campos de datos da lista.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 37 A entrada seleccionada ascende unha posición na lista.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 155 Lista os campos de datos da táboa fonte. Para incluír un deses campos na táboa de destino, marque a caixa de verificación situada diante do nome do campo de datos. Para atribuír o contido dun campo de datos da táboa fonte a un campo de datos da táboa de destino, prema no campo na lista da táboa fonte e, a seguir, nunha das frechas.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 2a Limpa as caixas de verificación da lista.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 37 A entrada seleccionada ascende unha posición na lista.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 39 A entrada seleccionada descende unha posición na lista..
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 39 A entrada seleccionada descende unha posición na lista..
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN 9b Lista os campos de datos posíbeis na táboa de destino. Na táboa de destino só se inclúen os campos de datos seleccionados na lista da táboa de orixe.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 6d Nas fontes de datos, só permite nomes con caracteres que se axusten ás restricións de nomeamento de SQL92.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b2 Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box clear.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 52 Use este campo de texto se necesita configurar opcións adicionais do controlador.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 7c Introduza unha instrución SQL que devolva o último valor incrementado automaticamente do campo de datos de chave primaria.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 72 Introduza a orde SQL que indica á fonte de datos o incremento automático do campo de datos INTEGER especificado.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 75 Permite a $[officename] soportar campos de datos incrementados automaticamente na fonte de datos ODBC ou JDBC actual.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 61 Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 91 Mostra os rexistros dun ficheiro, incluíndo os marcados como eliminados. Se selecciona esta caixa de verificación, non pode eliminar rexistros.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 38 Seleccione a táboa de base de datos que desexa indexar.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 49 Move os índices de táboa seleccionados á lista Índices dispoñíbeis.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 41 Move todos os índices de táboa á lista Índices dispoñíbeis.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 42 Lista os índices actuais da táboa de base de datos seleccionada.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 41 Move todos os índices dispoñíbeis á lista Índices de táboa.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 38 Move o índice seleccionado á lista Índices de táboa.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 41 Lista os índices dispoñíbeis que pode atribuír a unha táboa.
2f dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3ALB_HISTORY 6d Lista os ordes SQL executados anteriormente. Para executar de novo unha orde prema nel e despois en Executar.
34 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_STATUS 41 Mostra os resultados, incluíndo os erros, da orde SQL executado.
31 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_SQL 3c Introduza a orde de administración SQL que desexa executar.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3APB_EXECUTE 3d Executa a orde introducido na caixa Orde que será executada.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 123 Algunhas bases de datos rastrexan os cambios realizados en cada rexistro a través da atribución de números de versión aos campos alterados. Cada vez que se altera un campo, o número increméntase unha unidade. Mostra na táboa de base de datos o número de versión interno do rexistro.
d .uno%3ASortup 5f Ordena de maneira ascendente a lista de nomes de táboas, comezando polo principio do alfabeto.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 57 Mostra e permite editar os dereitos de acceso á base de datos do usuario seleccionado.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 45 Cambia o contrasinal do usuario actual para acceder á base de datos.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 42 Engade un novo usuario para acceder á base de datos seleccionada.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 1f Elimina o usuario seleccionado.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 3a Seleccione o usuario cuxa configuración desexa modificar.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 35 Mostra o camiño e o nome do ficheiro TRANSACTIONLOG.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 50 Mostra a cantidade de espazo libre (en megabytes) dispoñíbel na base de datos.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 37 Mostra o tamaño total (en megabytes) da base de datos.
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 39 Mostra a porcentaxe de espazo utilizado da base de datos.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 33 Mostra o camiño e o nome do ficheiro DATADEVSPACE.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 32 Mostra o camiño e o nome do ficheiro SYSDEVSPACE.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a7 Teclee o nome do usuario de dominio usado internamente por Adabas. Normalmente, a configuración predefinida do nome e contrasinal do usuario de dominio non se altera.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD 19 Introduza un contrasinal.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 34 Introduza en megabytes o tamaño da caché de datos.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD 19 Introduza un contrasinal.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 29 Introduza o camiño do DEVSPACE de datos.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 3d Introduza en megabytes o tamaño do ficheiro de transacción.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR e6 Introduza o nome do usuario a que desexa conceder un control limitado para a modificación dalgúns parámetros da base de datos. Normalmente, a configuración predefinida do nome e contrasinal do usuario de control non se altera.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1f Teclee o nome da base de datos.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 58 Introduza aquí o tamaño en megabytes da base de datos. O tamaño máximo é de 100 MB.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 47 Localice o cartafol en que desexa gardar o ficheiro e prema en Aceptar.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 47 Localice o cartafol en que desexa gardar o ficheiro e prema en Aceptar.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 19 Introduza un contrasinal.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 33 Introduza o nome do administrador da base de datos.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 47 Localice o cartafol en que desexa gardar o ficheiro e prema en Aceptar.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 28 Introduza o camiño do sistema DEVSPACE.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 3c Introduza o camiño do ficheiro de rexistro da transacción.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Crea un índice con instrucións ASC ou DESC.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 5f Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 35 Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3f Seleccione o tipo de comparación booleana que desexa utilizar.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 59 Uso de secuencias de escape para asociacións externas. A súa sintaxe é {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 3c Anexiona o alcume ao nome da táboa nas instrucións SELECT.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 3b Permite utilizar o nome do esquema nas instrucións SELECT.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 82 Seleccione para usar o código CR + LF  para finalizar cada liña de texto (preferentemente en sistemas operativos DOS e Windows).
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 5a Substitúe por un punto de interrogación (?) os parámetros nomeados nas fontes de datos.
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 4c Mostra o número de versión interna do rexistro na táboa da base de datos.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 4a Ignora privilexios de acceso fornecidos polo controlador da base de datos.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 65 Seleccione o conxunto de caracteres que desexa usar para visualizar a base de datos en $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 3c Seleccione o tipo de base de datos co cal desexa conectarse.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 47 Introduza o nome do controlador JDBC que se conecta coa fonte de datos.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 4a Proba a conexión da base de datos a través da clase de controlador JDBC.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 5b Se está marcada, o usuario deberá introducir o contrasinal para acceder á base de datos.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 59 Introduza o camiño ao documento de folla de cálculo que desexa usar como base de datos.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 22 Introduza o nome da base de datos.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3f Introduza o camiño do cartafol que contén os ficheiros dBASE.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 42 Introduza o camiño ao cartafol que contén os ficheiros de texto.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 3d Proba a conexión da base de datos coa configuración actual.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 6e O asistente da base de datos crea un ficheiro de base de datos que contén información sobre a base de datos.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 6e Seleccione esta opción para crear documentos de base de datos para a conexión con bases de datos existentes.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 52 Seleccione o tipo de base de datos para a conexión con bases de datos existentes.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST a0 Seleccione da lista de ficheiros utilizados recentemente un ficheiro de base de datos para o abrir. Prema en Rematar para abrir o ficheiro e saír do asistente.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC a6 Seleccione esta opción para abrir un ficheiro de base de datos dunha lista de ficheiros utilizados recentemente ou dunha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiro.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT b2 Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiro onde pode seleccionar un ficheiro de base de datos. Prema en Abrir ou en Aceptar para abrir o ficheiro e saír do asistente.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 3b Seleccione esta opción para crear unha nova base de datos.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 118 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Fields - Other) or in a mail merge.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 5e Seleccione esta opción para mostrar o ficheiro onde pode editar a estrutura da base de datos.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 6f Seleccioe esta opción para manter a información da base de datos tan só no ficheiro de base de datos creado.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 73 Seleccione esta opción para chamar o asistente de táboas despois da finalización do asistente de bases de datos.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 32 Especifica o camiño do ficheiro de base de datos.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 2e Introduza o nome do ficheiro de base de datos.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 3a Os nomes de usuario poden ter un máximo de 18 caracteres.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 32 Os contrasinais deben ter entre 3 e 18 caracteres.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 22 Introduza o URL da fonte de datos.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 47 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de base de datos.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 31 Introduza o camiño do ficheiro da base de datos.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 35 Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de camiño.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 47 nomeservidor é o nome do computador que executa a base de datos MySQL.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 25 Introduza o nome do controlador JDBC.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT f1 Introduza o URL da base de datos. Por exemplo, para o controlador JDBC para MySQL, introduza "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>. Para obter máis información sobre o controlador JDBC, consulte a documentación do controlador.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL f1 Introduza o URL da base de datos. Por exemplo, para o controlador JDBC para MySQL, introduza "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>. Para obter máis información sobre o controlador JDBC, consulte a documentación do controlador.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 52 Introduza o punto de inicio da busca da base de datos LDAP, por exemplo, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 52 Introduza o punto de inicio da busca da base de datos LDAP, por exemplo, "dc=com".
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 54 Crea unha conexión segura co servidor LDAP a través de SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 39 Introduza o porto do servidor LDAP. Normalmente é o 389.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 49 Introduza o nome do servidor LDAP utilizando o formato "ldap.server.com".
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 39 Introduza o porto do servidor LDAP. Normalmente é o 389.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 49 Introduza o nome do servidor LDAP utilizando o formato "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 40 Conecta con fontes de datos JDBC definidas nun nivel do sistema.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 40 Conecta con fontes de datos ODBC definidas nun nivel do sistema.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 31 Introduza o camiño do ficheiro da base de datos.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 4d Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de fonte de datos ODBC:
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 3a Introduza o número de porto do servidor da base de datos.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 29 Introduza o nome da base de datos Oracle.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 2d Introduza o URL do servidor da base de datos.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 3c Introduce o nome e camiño do ficheiro de folla de cálculo.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 5f Seleccione esta opción para solicitar un contrasinal ao usuario do documento de base de datos.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 86 Introduza ou seleccione o carácter usado como separador de millares no ficheiro de texto; por exemplo, coma (1,000) ou punto (1.000).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 86 Introduza ou seleccione o carácter usado como separador decimal no ficheiro de texto; por exemplo, un punto (0.5) ou unha coma (0,5).
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 5a Prema para acceder aos ficheiros personalizados. Introduza a extensión na caixa de texto.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 5b Introduza ou seleccione o carácter de separación de campos de datos do ficheiro de texto.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 5a Prema para acceder aos ficheiros personalizados. Introduza a extensión na caixa de texto.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 5a Introduza ou seleccione o carácter que identifica un campo de texto no ficheiro de texto.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 25 Prema para acceder aos ficheiros csv.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 108 Introduza o camiño dos ficheiros de texto. Se só quere un ficheiro, use calquera extensión. Se introduce un nome de cartafol, os ficheiros de texto nel incluídos deben ter a extensión *.csv para que sexan recoñecidos como ficheiros da base de datos de texto.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 25 Prema para acceder aos ficheiros txt.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 5b Abre unha xanela na cal pode editar a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
f .uno%3ADBRename 87 Renomea o obxecto seleccionado. Dependendo da base de datos, pode que algúns nomes, caracteres e tamaños de nomes non sexan válidos.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 3f Elimina a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 11 Abre un submenú.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 52 Inicia o Asistente de informes da táboa, consulta ou visualización seleccionada.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView 109 Converte en visualización a consulta seleccionada. A consulta orixinal permanece no ficheiro da base de datos e xérase unha visualización adicional no servidor da base de datos. Debe ter permiso de escritura para engadir unha visualización a unha base de datos.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 26 Abre o Asistente de tipo de conexión.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 36 Abre a caixa de diálogo Propiedades da base de datos.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 55 Inicia o Asistente de formularios da táboa, consulta ou visualización seleccionada.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 3f Elimina a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 5b Abre unha xanela na cal pode editar a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 32 Abre a caixa de diálogo de Propiedades avanzadas.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 36 Abre o obxecto seleccionado no último estado gardado.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 99 Exporta o informe seleccionado a un documento de texto. Créase un informe dinámico como copia dos contidos da base de datos no momento da exportación.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail 127 Abre o aplicativo de correo electrónico predefinido para enviar correos electrónicos. O informe seleccionado engádese como anexo. Pode introducir o asunto, os destinatarios e o corpo da mensaxe. No momento da exportación créase un informe dinámico como copia dos contidos da base de datos.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 36 Prema para subir un nivel na xerarquía de cartafoles.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 3f Prema para crear un novo cartafol no ficheiro da base de datos.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 3c Prema para gardar o formulario no ficheiro de base de datos.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 33 Introduza o nome de ficheiro do formulario gardado.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 2a Abre unha nova visualización en modo SQL.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 2b Abre a visualización de deseño de táboa.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 48 Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 5d Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite gardar un novo cartafol no ficheiro de base de datos.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 24 Abre unha nova consulta en modo SQL.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 28 Abre unha nova consulta en modo deseño.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 33 Abre un novo documento de texto en modo formulario.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 2e Abre unha nova visualización en modo deseño.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 2b Abre a visualización de deseño de táboa.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 5d Abre a caixa de diálogo Administración de usuario, se a base de datos soporta esa función.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 7d Abre a caixa de diálogo Filtro de táboa, na cal pode especificar as táboas da base de datos que desexa mostrar ou ocultar.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 69 Abre a visualización Deseño de relación e verifica se a conexión da base de datos soporta relacións.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 46 Abre a caixa de diálogo SQL, na cal pode introducir instrucións SQL.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 7d Abre a caixa de diálogo Filtro de táboa, na cal pode especificar as táboas da base de datos que desexa mostrar ou ocultar.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 5e Selecciona o depósito de consultas e mostra todas as consultas na visualización de detalles.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 11 Abre un submenú.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 11 Abre un submenú.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 62 Selecciona o depósito de formularios e mostra todos os formularios na visualización de detalles.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 39 Desactiva a previsualización na xanela da base de datos.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 41 A previsualización mostra o documento dun formulario ou informe.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Actualiza as táboas.
d .uno%3ADBSort 11 Abre un submenú.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 60 A xanela de previsualización mostra a información sobre o documento dun formulario ou informe.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 5c Selecciona o depósito de informes e mostra todos os informes na visualización de detalles.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 5a Selecciona o depósito de táboas e mostra todas as táboas na visualización de detalles.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 9e Escolla esta opción para usar o mesmo nome de usuario e o mesmo contrasinal ao conectarse de novo coa mesma fonte de datos na sesión actual de %PRODUCTNAME.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 3c Introduza o contrasinal para a conexión coa fonte de datos.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 40 Introduza o nome de usuario para a conexión coa fonte de datos.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 49 O Asistente de consultas axuda no deseño de consultas de bases de datos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 32 Especifica a táboa para a cal se crea a consulta.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 36 Mostra os campos que se van incluír na nova consulta.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 77 Especifica campos adicionais utilizados para ordenar a consulta creada, se os campos de ordenación previos son iguais.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 4a Especifica o campo utilizado como criterio para ordenar a consulta creada.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 77 Especifica campos adicionais utilizados para ordenar a consulta creada, se os campos de ordenación previos son iguais.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 77 Especifica campos adicionais utilizados para ordenar a consulta creada, se os campos de ordenación previos son iguais.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 33 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de filtro.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 64 Seleccione esta opción para filtrar a consulta por todas as condicións que usen o valor lóxico E.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 2a Introduza o valor da condición de filtro.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 2a Introduza o valor da condición de filtro.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 2a Introduza o valor da condición de filtro.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 63 Seleccione esta opción para filtrar a consulta por calquera condición que use o valor lóxico OU.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 33 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de filtro.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 33 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de filtro.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 22 Engade unha nova fila de controis.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 4f Seleccione esta opción para mostrar só os resultados das funcións agregadas.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 23 Elimina a última fila de controis.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 25 Seleccione o nome do campo numérico.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1f Seleccione a función agregada.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 38 Mostra os campos que se usarán para agrupar a consulta.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 5d Seleccione esta opción para agrupar a consulta polas condicións que usen o valor lóxico E.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 38 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2f Introduza o valor da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2f Introduza o valor da condición de agrupamento.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 38 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de agrupamento.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 27 Seleccione a condición do agrupamento.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 27 Seleccione a condición do agrupamento.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 38 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2f Introduza o valor da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 69 Seleccione esta opción para agrupar a consulta por calquera das condicións que usen o valor lóxico OU.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 27 Seleccione a condición do agrupamento.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 24 Introduza o alcume do nome de campo.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 1d Mostra un resumo da consulta.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 39 Seleccione esta opción para gardar e mostrar a consulta.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1d Introduza o nome da consulta.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 46 Seleccione esta opción para gardar a consulta e abrila para edición.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_TIME 8b Activar Incluír hora para inserir unha hora na área activa do informe. O campo da hora mostra mostra a hora cando o informe é executado.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_DATE 92 Activar Incluír data para inserir un campo de data na área activa do informe. O campo da data mostra a data actual cando o informe é executado.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
3b REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_BOTTOMPAGE e Páxina N de M
38 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_TOPPAGE e Páxina N de M
32 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N e Páxina N de M
32 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_PAGENUMBERS_LST_ALIGNMENT e Páxina N de M
37 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N_OF_M e Páxina N de M
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN e Páxina N de M
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 3f O asistente de táboas axuda a crear táboas de bases de datos.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 4e Seleccione a categoría de negocio para ver só mostras de táboas comerciais.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Mostra todos os campos que se incluirán na nova táboa.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES bb Escolla unha das táboas de mostra e, a seguir, seleccione algúns campos desa táboa na caixa de lista situada á esquerda. Repita este paso ata seleccionar todos os campos que necesite.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 49 Seleccione a categoría persoal para ver só mostras de táboas persoais.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 72 Introduza a orde SQL que indica á fonte de datos o incremento automático do campo de datos INTEGER especificado.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 30 Eliminar o campo seleccionado da caixa de lista.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 3d Se está definido como Si, este campo non pode estar baleiro.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 58 Mostra o nome do campo de datos seleccionado. Se o desexa, pode introducir un novo nome.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 4b Se a opción é Si, o mecanismo da base de datos xera o valor para o campo.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 31 Engadir un novo campo de datos á caixa de lista.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 2f Seleccione un campo para editar a información.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY 118 Seleccione esta opción para crear unha chave primaria. Engada unha chave primaria a cada táboa da base de datos para identificar de forma exclusiva cada rexistro. Nalgúns sistemas de base de datos de %PRODUCTNAME o uso de chaves primarias é obrigatorio para editar as táboas.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 55 Seleccione un campo ou prema en > para engadilo á lista de campos de chave primaria.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE dd Seleccione esta opción para introducir automaticamente un valor e incrementar o valor dos campos en cada novo rexistro. A base de datos debe soportar o incremento automático para poder usar a función Valor automático.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 5e Seleccione esta opción para engadir automaticamente unha chave primaria como campo adicional.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED ae Seleccione un campo e prema en < para eliminalo da lista de campos de chave primaria. A chave primaria créase como concatenación dos campos desta lista, de arriba a abaixo.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 1b Seleccione o nome de campo.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 5d Seleccione esta opción para crear chaves primarias mediante a combinación de varios campos.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC dd Seleccione esta opción para introducir automaticamente un valor e incrementar o valor dos campos en cada novo rexistro. A base de datos debe soportar o incremento automático para poder usar a función Valor automático.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 60 Seleccione esta opción para usar como chave primaria un campo existente con valores exclusivos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 1c Especifica o nome da táboa.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 5f Seleccione esta opción para gardar o deseño da táboa e abrir a táboa para introducir datos.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 41 Seleccione esta opción para gardar e editar o deseño da táboa.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 5a Seleccione o catálogo da táboa. (Só dispoñíbel se a base de datos soporta catálogos)
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD b2 Seleccione esta opción para crear un formulario baseado nesta táboa. O formulario créase nun documento de texto coa última configuración usada polo Asistente de formularios.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 56 Seleccione o esquema da táboa. (Só dispoñíbel se a base de datos soporta esquemas)
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 36 Abre a táboa seleccionada para modificar a estrutura.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 49 Abre a táboa seleccionada para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1f Elimina o informe seleccionado.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 20 Elimina a consulta seleccionada.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 20 Renomea a consulta seleccionada.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 4b Abre a consulta seleccionada para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 4d Abre o formulario seleccionado para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1f Renomea o informe seleccionado.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 38 Abre a consulta seleccionada para modificar a estrutura.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 35 Abre o informe seleccionado para modificar o deseño.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 22 Renomea o formulario seleccionado.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 4a Abre o informe seleccionado para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 3e Abre o formulario seleccionado para poder modificar o deseño.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1e Renomea a táboa seleccionada.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1e Elimina a táboa seleccionada.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 22 Elimina o formulario seleccionado.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 64 Cambia a altura das letras Fontwork dos obxectos seleccionados de normal á mesma altura para todos.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 56 Prema para aplicar o espazamento entre caracteres aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 26 Abre a xanela Aliñamento de Fontwork.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes 70 Abre a barra de ferramentas Forma Fontwork. Prema nunha forma para aplicala aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 34 Abre a xanela Espazamento entre caracteres Fontwork.
c FontWork1TBO 45 Prema para aplicar o aliñamento aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
c FontWork2TBO 3b Introduza o valor de espazamento entre caracteres Fontwork.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS 89 If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SHAREDOCUMENT%3ACB_SHARE dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 79 Se preme na icona Aplicar filtro baseado en formulario na barra de ferramentas Filtro de formulario, aplicarase o filtro.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 6b Se preme no botón Pechar da barra de ferramentas Filtro de formulario, o formulario móstrase sen filtros.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL e8 Nese menú pode editar as condicións de filtraxe directamente como texto. Para verificar se un filtro posúe ou non contido, pode seleccionar as condicións de filtro "baleiro" (SQL:"é nulo") ou "non baleiro" (SQL: "non é nulo").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 18d As condicións de filtraxe definidas móstranse no Navegador de filtros. Ao definir un filtro, aparece unha entrada de filtro en branco na parte inferior do Navegador de filtro. Pode seleccionar esa entrada premendo na palabra "Ou", o que lle permitirá introducir condicións de filtraxe adicionais. Estas condicións están ligadas mediante un OU booleano coas condicións definidas previamente.
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT e8 Nese menú pode editar as condicións de filtraxe directamente como texto. Para verificar se un filtro posúe ou non contido, pode seleccionar as condicións de filtro "baleiro" (SQL:"é nulo") ou "non baleiro" (SQL: "non é nulo").
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL e8 Nese menú pode editar as condicións de filtraxe directamente como texto. Para verificar se un filtro posúe ou non contido, pode seleccionar as condicións de filtro "baleiro" (SQL:"é nulo") ou "non baleiro" (SQL: "non é nulo").
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 76 Para conectar varias condicións de filtraxe co OU booleano, prema a icona Navegación de filtros na barra de filtros.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 99 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Graphics Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 35 The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 3c The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 3d Amosa o cadro de diálogo da licenza e da información legal.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu 51 O menú da Axuda permite iniciar e controlar o sistema da Axuda de $[officename].
c .uno%3AAbout 57 Mostra información xeral sobre o programa, como o número de versión e os copyrights.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits db Amosa o documento CREDITS.odt no que se inclúe a lista cos nomes dos colaboradores que contribuíron no código fonte de OpenOffice.org (e con contribucións importadas a LibreOffice) ou a LibreOffice desde 28-09-2010.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 64 Abre a páxina principal da Axuda de $[officename] do aplicativo que está a ser usado nese momento.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 8b A barra estándar está localizada na parte superior da xanela de $[officename] e está dispoñíbel en todos os aplicativos $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 5c Activa as suxestións de axuda adicionais baixo o apuntador do rato ata que se volva premer.
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 7a A barra Táboa contén as funcións necesarias para traballar con táboas. Aparece ao situar o cursor dentro dunha táboa.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 53 Inicia o asistente de combinación de correspondencia para crear cartas formulario.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns 49 Insire os campos do rexistro marcado na posición do cursor no documento.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 16 Crea un novo rexistro.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 4f Elimina un rexistro. Para eliminar unha consulta é necesario confirmala antes.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 2b Permítelle desfacer unha entrada de datos.
e .uno%3ARecSave 48 Garda unha nova entrada de datos. O cambio rexístrase na base de datos.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 1c Lévao ao seguinte rexistro.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 1b Lévao ao último rexistro.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 1c Lévao ao primeiro rexistro.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 1c Lévao ao rexistro anterior.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord 5d Mostra o número do rexistro actual. Introduza un número para ir ao rexistro correspondente.
e .uno%3AGridUse 43 Especifica que só pode mover os obxectos entre os puntos da grade.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 44 Esta icona converte un punto de canto ou suave nun punto simétrico.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX 55 A barra Editar puntos aparece cando selecciona un polígono e preme en Editar puntos.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete ac Utilice a icona Eliminar puntos para eliminar un ou varios puntos seleccionados. Para seleccionar varios puntos, manteña premida a tecla Maiús ao premer en cada un deles.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 30 Converte unha curva en liña recta ou viceversa.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 1f Pecha unha liña ou unha curva.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 38 Converte un punto de canto ou simétrico en punto suave.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 32 Activa o modo inserir, que permite inserir puntos.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 28 Activa un modo en que pode mover puntos.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 72 A icona Dividir curva divide unha curva. Seleccione o punto ou puntos onde desexa dividir a curva e prema na icona
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 3c Marca o punto actual ou os puntos seleccionados para borrar.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 3c Converte en puntos de canto o punto ou puntos seleccionados.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 5f Esta orde abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite configurar o programa de forma personalizada.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 27 Seleccione a entrada que desexa editar.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT 19 Teclee as súas iniciais.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TITLE 21 Teclee o seu título profesional.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_CITY 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FIRSTNAME 12 Teclee o seu nome.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME 18 Teclee os seus apelidos.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_SHORTNAME 19 Teclee as súas iniciais.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COUNTRY 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELCOMPANY 2e Teclee o número de teléfono da súa empresa.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_FAX 1c Teclee o seu número de fax.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP 2a Teclee neste campo o nome da súa empresa.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
17 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_GENERAL 41 Use este separador para introducir ou editar os datos de usuario.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_CITY 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MAIL 21 Teclee o seu correo electrónico.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FAX 1c Teclee o seu número de fax.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_PLZ 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME 12 Teclee o seu nome.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COMPANY 2a Teclee neste campo o nome da súa empresa.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_TITLE 21 Teclee o seu título profesional.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FAX 1c Teclee o seu número de fax.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_CITY 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STREET 1b Teclee o nome da súa rúa.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MAIL 21 Teclee o seu correo electrónico.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_STATE 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_NAME 18 Teclee os seus apelidos.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_POSITION 13 Teclee o seu cargo.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_POSITION 13 Teclee o seu cargo.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_ZIP 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_ZIPCODE 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELPRIVAT 2a Teclee o seu número de teléfono privado.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_ZIP 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
2c cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_STREET 1b Teclee o nome da súa rúa.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_CITY 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STREET 1b Teclee o nome da súa rúa.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_EMAIL 21 Teclee o seu correo electrónico.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_AUTOSAVE a5 Especifica que %PRODUCTNAME garde a información necesaria para restabelecer os documentos abertos en caso de falla. Pode indicar o intervalo temporal de gravación.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_INET 3c Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_FSYS 59 Marque esta caixa para seleccionar a gravación relativa de URLs no sistema de ficheiros.
29 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_APP 5b Especifica o tipo de documento para o que desexa definir o formato de ficheiro predefinido.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_SETTINGS 47 Carga co documento a configuración específica do usuario gardada nel.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_SAVE 7d Na sección Xeralpode seleccionar a configuración predefinida para gardar documentos e os formatos predefinidos de ficheiro.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_ODF_VERSION fc Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the listbox. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_DOCPRINTER 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
38 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_ALIEN_WARNING%3ACB_WARNING_OFF c2 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_BACKUP ba Cada vez que garda o documento garda tamén a versión anterior como copia de seguranza, coa extensión .BAK. Sempre que %PRODUCTNAME crea unha copia de seguranza, substitúe a anterior.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_WARNALIENFORMAT c2 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_NOPRETTYPRINTING 61 When saving the document, %PRODUCTNAME writes the XML data without indents and extra line breaks.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_FILTER cb Especifica que os documentos do tipo seleccionado á esquerda se garden sempre con este tipo de ficheiro. Pode seleccionar outro tipo de ficheiro para o documento actual na caixa de diálogo Gardar como.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_DOCINFO 65 Especifica que a caixa de diálogo Propiedades aparecerá cada vez que seleccione a orde Gardar como.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3AED_AUTOSAVE 60 Especifica cada cantos minutos gardar os documentos para a opción de recuperación automática.
18 CUI_HID_OPTPATH_CTL_PATH 72 Se quere modificar unha entrada da lista, selecciónea e prema Editar ou prema directamente dúas veces sobre ela.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_PATH 4f Prema para acceder á caixa de diálogo Seleccionar camiño ou Editar camiños.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PATH 8b Esta sección contén os camiños predefinidos para acceder a cartafoles importantes de $[officename]. O usuario pode editar eses camiños.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_STANDARD 5d O botón Predefinido restabelece os camiños predefinidos de todas as entradas seleccionadas.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH 8b Abre a caixa de diálogo Seleccionar camiños para seleccionar outro cartafol ou a caixa de diálogo Abrir para seleccionar outro ficheiro.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH 5e Contén unha lista dos camiños xa engadidos. Marca o camiño predefinido para novos ficheiros
1b CUI_HID_LNGDLG_NUM_PREBREAK 51 Teclee o número mínimo de caracteres que debe haber antes ou despois do guión.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_WORD 88 Pódese introducir unha palabra nova para a súa inclusión no dicionario. Na lista verase o contido do dicionario personalizado actual.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 3b Atribúe un novo idioma ao dicionario personalizado actual.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_MODULES_EDIT 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW ab Abre a caixa de diálogo Novo dicionario, onde pode atribuír un nome a un novo dicionario definido polo usuario ou a un dicionario de excepcións, e especificar o idioma.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 33 Especifica o nome do novo dicionario personalizado.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_EDIT_DIC 94 Abre a caixa de diálogo Editar dicionario personalizado, que permite facer adicións no seu dicionario personalizado ou editar entradas existentes.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_NEW_DIC ab Abre a caixa de diálogo Novo dicionario, onde pode atribuír un nome a un novo dicionario definido polo usuario ou a un dicionario de excepcións, e especificar o idioma.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_OPTIONS_EDIT 3d Para cambiar un valor seleccione a entrada e prema en Editar.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 2e Lista os dicionarios de usuario dispoñíbeis.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 54 Ao seleccionar un idioma determinado pode limitar o uso do dicionario personalizado.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_NEW_REPLACE b8 Engade no dicionario personalizado actual a palabra situada no campo de texto Palabra. Cando se traballa con dicionarios de excepcións engádese tamén a situada no campo Suxestión .
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 94 Abre a caixa de diálogo Editar dicionario personalizado, que permite facer adicións no seu dicionario personalizado ou editar entradas existentes.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 44 Define as opcións da verificación ortográfica e da guionización.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 4b Verifica a ortografía e subliña os erros de forma automática ao teclear.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 36 Elimina a palabra marcada do dicionario personalizado.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_LNG_ED_NUM_PREBREAK%3AED_PREBREAK 51 Teclee o número mínimo de caracteres que debe haber antes ou despois do guión.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 68 Especifica as propiedades da verificación ortográfica, do dicionario de sinónimos e da guionización.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_DEL_DIC 5d Elimina o dicionario seleccionado depois de confirmar, se non está protexido contra escrita.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_ALLDICTS 25 Especifica o libro que se vai editar.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ABTN_EXCEPT 4a Especifica se o usuario desexa evitar certas palabras nos seus documentos.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 29 Contén os módulos de idioma instalados.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_REPLACE b4 Este campo de entrada está unicamente dispoñíbel cando se edita un dicionario de excepcións. O campo mostra a suxestión relacionada coa palabra que aparece na caixa "Palabra".
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 48 Aumenta un nivel a prioridade do módulo seleccionado na caixa de lista.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 4a Disminúe un nivel a prioridade do módulo seleccionado na caixa de lista.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES 8b Especifica o idioma, a ortografía, a guionización e os submódulos do dicionario de sinónimos dispoñíbeis para o módulo seleccionado.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 1f Especifica o idioma do módulo.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 4a Prema nesta opción para desfacer os cambios realizados na caixa de lista.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 5 Verde
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 8 Vermello
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL 6c Para modificar, seleccione o modelo de cor: RGB (Vermello-Verde-Azul) ou CMYK (Ciano-Maxenta-Amarelo-Negro).
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE 68 Abre a caixa de diálogo Gardar como, que lle permite gardar a táboa actual de cores cun nome concreto.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 15 Engade unha nova cor.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME 34 Especifica o nome da cor seleccionada ou dunha nova.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR 62 Permítelle seleccionar unha cor da táboa de cores, editar unha existente ou definir novas cores.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 54 Accede á caixa  de diálogo Abrir, que lle permite seleccionar unha paleta de cores
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 14 Cambia a cor actual.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 5b Contén a lista das cores dispoñíbeis. Se desexa seleccionar unha cor escóllaa na lista.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 4 Azul
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 54 Accede á caixa  de diálogo Abrir, que lle permite seleccionar unha paleta de cores
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 27 Define o brillo no modelo de cores HSB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 26 Define o matiz no modelo de cores HSB.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 3d Define o valor ou chave da cor negra no modelo de cores CMYK.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 36 Define o valor da cor maxenta no modelo de cores CMYK.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 3d Define o valor ou chave da cor negra no modelo de cores CMYK.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 b5 Sitúa o cursor de selección pequeno da xanela dereita sobre a cor que corresponde á seleccionada na xanela esquerda, e actualiza os valores correspondentes nos campos numéricos.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 34 Define o valor da cor ciano no modelo de cores CMYK.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 a4 Prema no botón <-- para substituír a cor seleccionada na paleta pola cor seleccionada á dereita. O botón actívase ao seleccionar unha cor nun dos catro cantos.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 32 Define o valor da cor azul no modelo de cores RGB.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 36 Define o valor da cor amarela no modelo de cores CMYK.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 36 Define o valor da cor amarela no modelo de cores CMYK.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 33 Define o valor da cor verde no modelo de cores RGB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 36 Define o valor da cor vermella no modelo de cores RGB.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 36 Define o valor da cor maxenta no modelo de cores CMYK.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 2c Define a saturación no modelo de cores HSB.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 34 Define o valor da cor ciano no modelo de cores CMYK.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_TOOLTIP 86 Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters.
33 cui%3APushButton%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3APB_HELPAGENT_RESET 8b Prema no botón Redefinir o asistente da Axuda para restaurar a lista predefinida das situacións en que se mostrará o asistente da Axuda.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_EXTHELP 79 Mostra un texto de axuda ao pousar o apuntador sobre unha icona, un menú de ordes ou un control dunha caixa de diálogo.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_HELPAGENT ca Especifica que o asistente da Axuda se mostre automaticamente nas situacións seleccionadas. Prema a xanela do Asistente de Axuda para ver unha páxina de Axuda con información sobre o contexto actual.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_DOCSTATUS 41 Especifica se a impresión do documento conta como modificación.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_FILEDLG a5 Especifica se as caixas de diálogo de $[officename] se van usar para abrir e gardar documentos. De non ser así, úsanse as caixas de diálogo do sistema operativo.
2f cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ANF_YEARVALUE 55 Define un intervalo de data, dentro do cal o sistema recoñece anos de dous díxitos.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ALB_HELPFORMAT 30 Escolla un estilo para a Axuda de $[officename].
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTHEIGHT 5d Seleccione un tamaño de tipo de letra para a visualización dos códigos fonte HTML e Basic.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_USETABLE 43 Activa a configuración de substitución de tipo de letra definida.
18 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_DELETE 29 Elimina a substitución de tipo de letra.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT2 41 Insira ou seleccione o nome do tipo de letra que desexa utilizar.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT1 44 Teclee ou seleccione o nome do tipo de letra que desexa substituír.
1d CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBSTITUTION e6 Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_NONPROP 61 Comprobe que na lista de caixa Tipos de letra só se visualizan tipos de letra non proporcionais.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTNAME 50 Seleccione o tipo de letra para a visualización dos código fonte HTML e Basic.
1a CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBST_CLB f0 Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing.
17 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_APPLY 28 Aplica a substitución de tipo de letra.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT 88 Especifica a utilización do tipo de letra do sistema nos menús e caixas de diálogo. Se non, utilízase outro tipo de letra instalado.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT 88 Especifica a utilización do tipo de letra do sistema nos menús e caixas de diálogo. Se non, utilízase outro tipo de letra instalado.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONTANTIALIASING 47 Seleccione esta opción para suavizar a aparencia do texto en pantalla.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 26 Especifica opcións de visualización.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 6f Especifica se o apuntador do rato se debe colocar nas caixas de diálogo acabadas de abrir e como debe facerse.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 56 Prema Maiús+Ctrl+R para restaurar ou actualizar a visualización do documento actual.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 7a Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 94 No comezo da lista situada na caixa Nome de tipo de letra da barra Formatado móstranse os últimos cinco tipos de letra usados no documento actual.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION b0 If enabled, the text selection in Writer and the cell selection in Calc will be shown using a transparent color. If not enabled, the selection will be shown by inverted colors.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 38 Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 2c Define a función do botón central do rato.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW 97 Mostra os nomes dos tipos de letra seleccionábeis no tipo de letra correspondente, por exemplo, os situados na caixa Tipo de letra da barra Formatado.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 8f Usa a escala do percentil para o tamaño do tipo de letra nos elementos da interface de usuario, como caixas de diálogo e etiquetas de iconas.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL 80 Accede directamente aos recursos de hardware do adaptador gráfico de visualización para mellorar a visualización da pantalla.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ANF_AA_POINTLIMIT 47 Introduza o tamaño menor de tipo de letra para aplicar a suavización.
44 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_NORMAL 73 A calidade de impresión alta corresponde a unha resolución de 300 ppp e a de impresión normal a unha de 200 ppp.
3f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY aa Ao marcar este campo, os obxectos transparentes imprímense da maneira habitual e os obxectos non transparentes segundo o escollido nos dous botóns de opción seguintes.
36 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERSIZE 61 Marque esta caixa de verificación se necesita un tamaño de papel específico para a impresión.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_AUTO 75 Especifica que a transparencia só se imprimirá se a área transparente abrangue menos dun cuarto de toda a páxina.
3f sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTFILEOUTPUT 5c Especifica se a configuración se aplica á impresión directa ou á impresión en ficheiro.
3a sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS 74 Especifica que os mapas de bits se imprimen con calidade reducida. A resolución pode reducirse mais non aumentarse.
44 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ALB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 7b Especifica a calidade máxima de impresión en ppp (puntos por polgada). A resolución pode reducirse mais non aumentarse..
39 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_TRANSPARENCY 67 Marque esta caixa de verificación para recibir un aviso se o documento contén obxectos transparentes.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_COLOR 46 Especifica que as gradacións se impriman nunha única cor intermedia.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_OPTIMAL 73 A calidade de impresión alta corresponde a unha resolución de 300 ppp e a de impresión normal a unha de 200 ppp.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STRIPES 47 Especifica o número máximo de faixas de gradación para a impresión.
47 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS_TRANSPARENCY 84 Se marca este campo, a redución da calidade de impresión dos mapas de bits aplícase tamén ás áreas transparentes dos obxectos.
48 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 7b Especifica a calidade máxima de impresión en ppp (puntos por polgada). A resolución pode reducirse mais non aumentarse..
3c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEGRADIENTS 46 Se marca este campo, as gradacións imprímense con calidade reducida.
3d sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTEROUTPUT 5c Especifica se a configuración se aplica á impresión directa ou á impresión en ficheiro.
4a sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STEPCOUNT 47 Especifica o número máximo de faixas de gradación para a impresión.
3d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERORIENTATION 5a Marque esta caixa de verificación se necesita orientar o papel dunha maneira determinada.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_NONE 3a Se escolle esta opción non se imprimirá a transparencia.
40 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_CONVERTTOGREYSCALES 3a Especifica que as cores se impriman como escala de grises.
30 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_OLECACHE 3d Escolla o número máximo de obxectos OLE reunidos na caché.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ACB_QUICKLAUNCH 89 Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICOBJECTCACHE 64 Especifica que non se copien na caché os obxectos maiores que o número de megabytes seleccionados.
36 cui%3ATimeField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ATF_GRAPHICOBJECTTIME 49 Especifica en horas e minutos o tempo que permanece cada imaxe na caché.
2c cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3AED_UNDO 5e Permite especificar o número de pasos que poden desfacerse seleccionando un número da lista.
34 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICCACHE 3a Especifica o tamaño total da caché para todas as imaxes.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 2a Introduza un nome para o esquema de cores.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_SAVESCHEME 62 Garda a configuración actual como un esquema de cores que máis adiante vostede poderá recargar.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3ALB_COLORSCHEME 32 Selecciona o esquema de cores que desexa utilizar.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_DELETESCHEME 61 Elimina o esquema de cores mostrado na caixa Esquema. O esquema predefinido non se pode eliminar.
29 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_COLORLIST_WIN 3e Seleccione as cores para os elementos da interface de usuario.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTO_DETECT_HC 59 Cambia %PRODUCTNAME ao modo alto contraste cando a cor do fondo do sistema é moi escura.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TIPHELP 5c Oculta as suxestións da Axuda ao transcorrer o número de segundos introducido por vostede.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_GRAPHICS 42 Previsualiza imaxes animadas, como as imaxes GIF, en %PRODUCTNAME.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ANF_TIPHELP 52 Especifique durante cantos segundos desexa que se mostren as suxestións da Axuda.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TEXTSELECTION 2d Mostra o cursor en documentos só de lectura.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_PAGE_PREVIEWS 61 Aplica a configuración de alto contraste do sistema operativo ás previsualizacións de páxina.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ACCESSIBILITY_TOOL 114 Permite usar ferramentas tecnolóxicas adaptadas para persoas con discapacidades, como lectores de pantalla externos, dispositivos Braille ou de recoñecemento de voz. Para poder activalas é necesario que o JRE (contorno de execución Java) estea instalado no seu computador.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTOMATIC_FONT_COLOR 89 Mostra os tipos de letra en %PRODUCTNAME usando a configuración de cor do sistema. Esta opción afecta só á presentación en pantalla.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_TEXTS 50 Previsualiza texto animado, como o que pestanexa e se despraza, en %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PROXY 29 Teclee o nome do servidor proxy para FTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PROXY 2a Teclee o nome do servidor proxy para HTTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_SOCKS_PORT 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PORT 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_NOPROXYFOR 5f Especifica os nomes dos servidores que non requiren servidor proxy, separados por punto e coma.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PROXY 2a Especifica o tipo de definición de proxy.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PORT 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PORT 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PROXY 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3ALB_PROXYMODE 2a Especifica o tipo de definición de proxy.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MAIL%3AED_MAILERURL 40 Introduza o camiño e o nome do programa de correo electrónico.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MAIL%3APB_MAILERURL 5b Abre unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro para seleccionar o programa de correo electrónico.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MOZPLUGIN%3ACB_MOZPLUGIN_CODE c4 Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click any %PRODUCTNAME document hyperlink.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SIGNDOCS cb Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_CHANGE 51 Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVEALL 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
42 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_REPEAT 20 Enter the master password again.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CTRLHYPERLINK 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
37 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD 26 Enter the master password to continue.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3ACB_SEC_SAVEPASSWORDS bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_RECOMMENDPWD c8 Active a opción Gardar con contrasinal para que se solicite un contrasinal nas caixas de diálogo para gardar ficheiros. Desmarque a opción se desexa gardar os ficheiros por defecto sen contrasinal.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_CONNECTIONS 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CREATEPDF 93 Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
45 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_SECURITYOPTIONS 30 Opens the "Security options and warning" dialog.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_PRINTDOCS 6b Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
3e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MACROSEC 2c Abre a caixa de diálogo Seguranza de macro.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVE 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
3f uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT 1a Enter the master password.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MASTERPASSWORD 27 Opens the Enter Master Password dialog.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVEINFO d8 Select to always remove user data from the file properties. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset button on File - Properties - General.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SAVESENDDOCS 7d Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC_WARNING 7e Se este campo está marcado ao exportar para HTML móstrase un aviso que advirte da perda das macros básicas de %PRODUCTNAME.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE2 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_UNKNOWN_TAGS 78 Marque esta caixa de verificación se quere que se importen como campos as etiquetas non recoñecidas por $[officename].
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE3 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_CHARSET 41 Seleccione o conxunto de caracteres apropiado para a exportación
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE1 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE4 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_NUMBERS_ENGLISH_US d6 If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_IGNORE_FONTNAMES ae Marque esta caixa de verificación se desexa ignorar a configuración do tipo de letra durante a importación. Usaranse os tipos de letra definidos no estilo de páxina HTML.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_PRINT_EXTENSION 55 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE5 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE7 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_LOCAL_GRF fd Marque esta caixa de verificación para cargar automaticamente as imaxes incorporadas do servidor da internet cando envie por FTP. Use a caixa de diálogo Gardar como para gardar o documento e introduza un URL completo como nome de ficheiro na internet.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC 78 Marque esta caixa de verificación para incluír as instruccións $[officename] Basic cando exporte para o formato HTML.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_EXPORT 3b Define a configuración de exportación de documentos HTML.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE6 a6 Utilice os botóns xiratorios Tamaño 1 a Tamaño 7 para definir os tamaños correspondentes de tipo de letra para as etiquetas HTML de <font size=1> a <font size=7>.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a1 Esta configuración determina como tratar os documentos de texto creados en $[officename]. Tamén pode definir a configuración para o documento de texto actual.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_GRF 3f Especifica se deben mostrarse en pantalla os obxectos e imaxes.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VSCROLL 29 Mostra a barra de desprazamento vertical.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HRULER 55 Mostra a regra horizontal. Seleccione unha unidade de medida na lista correspondente.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_VMETRIC 59 Mostra a regra vertical. Seleccione a unidade de medida desexada na lista correspondente.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER 59 Mostra a regra vertical. Seleccione a unidade de medida desexada na lista correspondente.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_ANY_RULER 73 Activa as regras. Use as dúas caixas de verificación seguintes para seleccionar a(s) regra(s) que desexa mostrar.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HSCROLL 2b Mostra a barra de desprazamento horizontal.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_TBL 2a Mostra as táboas existentes no documento.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_FIELD 46 Mostra os nomes dos campos existentes no documento, en vez do contido.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_METRIC 2a Especifica a unidade para documentos HTML.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_CROSS ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_POSTIT dc Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_SMOOTH_SCROLL 34 Activa a función de desprazamento suave de páxina.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER_RIGHT 29 Aliña a regra vertical ao bordo dereito.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_DRWFAST 33 Mostra os debuxos e controis contidos no documento.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_HMETRIC 55 Mostra a regra horizontal. Seleccione unha unidade de medida na lista correspondente.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries b0 Para mostrar os límites de táboa prema co botón dereito do rato en calquera táboa e escolla Bordos de táboa ou escolla Táboa - Límites de táboa nun documento de Writer.
24 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_IDX 5c Especifica o tipo de letra utilizado para índices, índices alfabéticos e índices xerais.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST 4f Especifica os tipos de letra para as listas, a numeración e estilos derivados.
2f sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD_SIZE 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE_SIZE 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ACB_DOCONLY 42 Especifica que a configuración se aplica só ao documento actual.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL_SIZE 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
f SW_HID_STD_FONT 46 Especifica a configuración de tipos de letra básicos dos documentos.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_INDEX_SIZE 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
29 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD 53 Especifica o tipo de letra que desexa usar para o estilo de parágrafo predefinido.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE 3c Especifica o tipo de letra que desexa usar para os títulos.
2b sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST_SIZE 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL 48 Especifica o tipo de letra utilizado para as lendas de imaxes e táboas.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_CTRLFLD 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
34 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PAPERFROMSETUP a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_REVERSE 72 Specifies whether to reverse the printing order. The last page of the document will then be the first one printed.
2c sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PROSPECT_RTL 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_SINGLEJOBS 62 Specifies that each new print job will begin on a new page even if you are using a duplex printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ALB_FAX 8e Se instalou un programa de fax no computador e desexa enviar un fax directamente desde o documento de texto, seleccione o fax que desexa usar.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BLACK_FONT 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_RIGHTP 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_LEFTP 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2b sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_HIDDEN_TEXT 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
14 SW_HID_OPTPRINT_PAGE 49 Especifica a configuración de impresión nun documento de texto ou HTML.
30 sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_TEXT_PLACEHOLDER 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PGRF 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PROSPECT 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2f sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PRINTEMPTYPAGES 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
14 SW_HID_OPTTABLE_PAGE 38 Define os atributos das táboas nos documentos de texto.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 5f Especifica se o título da táboa se reproduce na nova páxina despois dunha quebra de páxina.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIX 74 Especifica que as modificacións efectuadas sobre unha fila ou columna só afectan a correspondente área adxacente.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFMT_FORMATTING b9 Se a opción Recoñecemento de formato numérico non está seleccionada, só se aceptan as entradas co formato definido na cela. As demais entradas estabelecen o seu formato como Texto.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_VAR 58 Especifica que os cambios realizados nunha fila ou columna afectan ao tamaño da táboa.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMALIGNMENT 4f Especifica que os números se aliñen sempre na parte inferior dereita da cela.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_HEADER 60 Especifica que a primeira fila da táboa se formate co estilo de parágrafo "Título de táboa".
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_BORDER 3e Especifica que as celas da táboa teñan un bordo predefinido.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition 60 Especifica que os números situados nas táboas de texto se recoñezan e formaten como números.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 4a Especifica que ningún tipo de quebra de fluxo de texto divida as táboas.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFORMATTING 60 Especifica que os números situados nas táboas de texto se recoñezan e formaten como números.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWMOVE 38 Especifica o valor que debe utilizarse para mover filas.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIXPROP 53 Especifica que os cambios realizados nunha fila ou columna afectan a toda a táboa.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLINSERT 35 Especifica o valor predefinido para inserir columnas.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWINSERT 32 Especifica o valor predefinido para inserir filas.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLMOVE 3b Especifica o valor que debe utilizarse para mover columnas.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_PARA 7d Especifica se deben mostrarse os delimitadores de parágrafos, os cales conteñen información sobre o formato de parágrafo.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLTAB 7a Ao usar o cursor directo engádense no novo parágrafo as tabulacións necesarias para alcanzar a posición na que premeu.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLINDENT 93 Ao usar o cursor directo, a sangría esquerda defínese na posición horizontal en que prema co cursor directo. O parágrafo alíñase á esquerda.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_CHAR_HIDDEN 7c Mostra o texto que utiliza o formato de carácter "oculto" cando a opción Ver - Caracteres non imprimíbeis está activada.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLSPACE 84 Ao usar o cursor directo engádense no novo parágrafo as tabulacións e espazos necesarios para alcanzar a posición na que premeu.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN_PARA 7d Se vostede inseriu texto utilizando o campo Parágrafo oculto, esta opción especifica se o parágrafo oculto debe mostrarse.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLMARGIN ec Define o aliñamento do parágrafo ao usar o cursor directo. O parágrafo aliñarase á esquerda, centrado ou á dereita segundo o lugar onde prema co rato. Antes de premer, o cursor indica mediante un triángulo o aliñamento definido.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_ALLOW_IN_PROT 64 Especifica que vostede pode situar o cursor nunha área protexida, mais non realizar ningún cambio.
12 SW_HID_OPTSHDWCRSR 77 Define a visualización de determinados caracteres e do cursor directo nos documentos HTML e de texto de $[officename].
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_HSPACE c6 Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHYPH 164 Especifica se deben mostrarse os delimitadores definidos polo usuario, que son uns delimitadores ocultos que se introducen nas palabras ao premer Comando+guión(-) Ctrl+guión(-). As palabras con delimitadores definidos polo usuario só se separan na fin de liña no punto en que se inseriu o delimitador, estea ou non activada a guionización automática.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_BREAK 87 Mostra todas as quebras de liña inseridas mediante o atallo Maiús+Intro. Esas quebras crean novas liñas, mais non novos parágrafos.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN 45 Mostra o texto oculto polos campos Texto condicional ou Texto oculto.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SPACE 4a Especifica se deben representarse cun punto os espazos presentes no texto.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHDWCRSONOFF 18 Activa o cursor directo.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_TAB 40 Especifica que as tabulacións se mostren como frechas pequenas.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_MARKPOS 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_COL ee Tamén se pode seleccionar unha cor para cada tipo de modificación gravada. Ao escoller na lista a condición "Por autor", $[officename] determina automaticamente a cor e múdaa de xeito que se corresponda co autor de cada modificación.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_LC_COL 43 Especifica a cor usada para realzar as liñas modificadas no texto.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_ATTR cd Especifica como deben mostrarse os cambios realizados no documento ao eliminar un texto. Se rexistra eliminacións de texto, este móstrase co atributo seleccionado (por exemplo, riscado) e non se elimina.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_ATTR 56 Seleccione como deben mostrarse os cambios realizados no documento ao inserir o texto.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_COL ee Tamén se pode seleccionar unha cor para cada tipo de modificación gravada. Ao escoller na lista a condición "Por autor", $[officename] determina automaticamente a cor e múdaa de xeito que se corresponda co autor de cada modificación.
12 SW_HID_REDLINE_OPT 37 Define a aparencia dos cambios realizados no documento.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_ATTR 9e Define como deben mostrarse no documento as modificacións realizadas nos atributos de texto, que afectan a atributos como a negra, a cursiva ou o subliñado.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_COL ee Tamén se pode seleccionar unha cor para cada tipo de modificación gravada. Ao escoller na lista a condición "Por autor", $[officename] determina automaticamente a cor e múdaa de xeito que se corresponda co autor de cada modificación.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_ALWAYS 35 Actualiza sempre as ligazóns ao cargar un documento.
13 SW_HID_OPTLOAD_PAGE 3a Especifica a configuración xeral dos documentos de texto.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_CHARTS d5 Especifica se actualizar automaticamente as gráficas. Sempre que se modifica o valor dunha cela dunha táboa de Writer, a gráfica que mostra ese valor actualízase automaticamente así que o cursor deixa a cela.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_NEVER 38 As ligazóns nunca se actualizan ao cargar un documento.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_REQUEST 44 Ao cargar un documento actualiza as ligazóns só cando se solicita.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ALB_METRIC 37 Especifica a unidade de medida dos documentos de texto.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_NEVER 38 As ligazóns nunca se actualizan ao cargar un documento.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3AMF_TAB 3b Especifica o espazamento entre as tabulacións individuais.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_REQUEST 44 Ao cargar un documento actualiza as ligazóns só cando se solicita.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_ALWAYS 35 Actualiza sempre as ligazóns ao cargar un documento.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 82 Especifica que os parámetros da impresora se aplican tanto para a impresión como para o formatado da visualización na pantalla.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE%3APB_DEFAULT 7e Prema para que a configuración deste separador se aplique como predefinida en sesións futuras de traballo con  %PRODUCTNAME.
1c SW_HID_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE 9f Especifica a configuración de compatibilidade para documentos de texto. Estas opcións axudan a axustar %PRODUCTNAME ao importar documentos de Microsoft Word.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 21 Especifica o estilo de carácter.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_FORMAT 2c Especifica o tipo de numeración solicitado.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AEDT_TEXT 5a Define o carácter que se vai mostrar despois do número de nivel de título ou capítulo.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_LEVEL 56 Especifica os niveis de títulos ou capítulos en que desexa que comece a numeración.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AED_SEPARATOR 5a Define o carácter que se vai mostrar despois do número de nivel de título ou capítulo.
15 SW_HID_OPTCAPTION_CLB 59 Seleccione o tipo de obxecto para o cal é válida a configuración de Lenda automática.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_POS 37 Determina a posición da lenda en relación ao obxecto.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ACB_APPLYBORDER 2c Engade un bordo ou sombra ao marco da lenda.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_CATEGORY 30 Especifica a categoría do obxecto seleccionado.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_X 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
14 SVX_HID_OPTIONS_GRID af Especifica a configuración da grade nas páxinas do documento. Esta grade axuda a determinar a posición exacta dos obxectos. Pode aliñarse coa grade de axuste "magnética".
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_GRID_VISIBLE 25 Especifica se a grade debe mostrarse.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_Y 64 Define o espazamento que hai entre os puntos da grade, na unidade de medida escollida para o eixo Y.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 53 Especifica se é necesario cambiar a configuración da grade actual simetricamente.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_Y 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_USE_GRIDSNAP 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_X 64 Define o espazamento que hai entre os puntos da grade, na unidade de medida escollida para o eixo X.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 25 Especifica se a grade debe mostrarse.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions 11e Define varias opcións das follas de cálculo, o contido que se debe mostrar e o sentido do cursor tras realizar entradas en celas. Tamén permite definir listas de clasificación, determinar o número de decimais e a configuración quen se van usar para rexistrar e realzar os cambios.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions 11e Define varias opcións das follas de cálculo, o contido que se debe mostrar e o sentido do cursor tras realizar entradas en celas. Tamén permite definir listas de clasificación, determinar o número de decimais e a configuración quen se van usar para rexistrar e realzar os cambios.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_OUTLINE 80 Se definiu un esquema, a opción Símbolos de esquema especifica se eses símbolos de esquema deben mostrarse no bordo da folla.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_PAGEBREAKS 61 Especifica se deben visualizarse as quebras de páxina dentro dunha área de impresión concreta.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_RFIND cc Especifica o uso de cores para realzar as referencias situadas na fórmula. O intervalo de celas resáltase cun bordo coloreado no momento de seleccionar a cela que contén a referencia que se vai editar.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_OBJGRF 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_NIL 35 Especifica se deben mostrarse os números de valor 0.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ROWCOLHEADER 41 Especifica se deben mostrarse as cabeceiras das filas e columnas.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_FORMULA 4b Especifica se nas celas deben mostrarse as fórmulas en vez dos resultados.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_GRID db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANCHOR 5d Especifica se a icona de áncora aparece ao seleccionar un obxecto inserido, como unha imaxe.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANNOT d1 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_CLIP fd Cando a largura do texto é superior á da cela que o contén, o excedente de texto móstrase nas celas adxacentes baleiras da mesma fila. Cando non hai máis celas baleiras aparece un pequeno triángulo no bordo da cela indicando que o texto continúa.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_COLOR 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CONTENT 8b Define que elementos se mostran da xanela principal de %PRODUCTNAME Calc. Tamén permite mostrar ou ocultar o realce de valores en táboas.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_TBLREG 56 Especifica se os separadores de follas deben mostrarse na parte inferior do documento.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_HSCROLL 6a Especifica se a barra de desprazamento horizontal debe mostrarse na parte inferior da xanela do documento.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_SYNCZOOM 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DRAW 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VALUE db Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, and number cells in blue, no matter how their display is formatted.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VSCROLL 64 Especifica se debe mostrarse unha barra de desprazamento vertical á dereita da xanela do documento.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DIAGRAM 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_GUIDELINE 69 Especifica se deben mostrarse as guías durante o movemento de debuxos, marcos, imaxes e outros obxectos.
2d sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3AMF_TAB 24 Define a distancia das tabulacións.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_MARKHDR 4f Especifica se as cabeceiras das filas e columnas seleccionadas deben realzarse.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_ALIGN 63 Determina a dirección en que se moverá o cursor na folla de cálculo tras premer na tecla Intror.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EDITMODE 50 Permítelle editar imediatamente a cela seleccionada tras premer na tecla Intro.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_TEXTFMT 6f Especifica que se está aplicando a métrica da impresora paraimprimir e formatar a visualización na pantalla.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_REPLWARN 8a Especifica que debe mostrarse un aviso ao pegar celas desde o portapapeis ata un intervalo de celas non baleiro. Aparece unha advertencia.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 50 Permítelle editar imediatamente a cela seleccionada tras premer na tecla Intro.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_ALIGN 63 Determina a dirección en que se moverá o cursor na folla de cálculo tras premer na tecla Intror.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_FORMAT 6b Especifica se os atributos de formatado da cela seleccionada deben aplicarse ás celas adxacentes baleiras.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_UNIT 31 Define a unidade de medida en follas de cálculo.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EXPREF 145 Especifica se as referencias deben expandirse durante a inserción de columnas ou filas adxacentes ao intervalo de referencia. Isto só é posíbel se o intervalo de referencia, onde está inserida a columna ou fila, ocupaba orixinalmente un mínimo dúas celas orientadas no mesmo sentido en que se pretenden orientar agora.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_NEW 34 Insire o contido dunha nova lista na caixa Entradas.
36 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_ENTRIES 49 Mostra o contido da lista seleccionada nese momento, o cal pode editarse.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS d9 As listas definidas polo usuario móstranse na caixa de diálogo Listas de ordenación. Pode definir e editar as súas propias listas. Só é posíbel usar texto como listas de ordenación, os números non se aceptan.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_COPY 12b Copia o contido das celas na caixa Copiar a lista de. Se selecciona unha referencia a filas e columnas, despois de premer no botón aparece a caixa de diálogo Copiar lista. Utilice esa caixa de diálogo para definir se a referencia se vai converter en listas de ordenación por fila ou por columna.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_COPYFROM a4 Define a folla de cálculo e as celas que van copiarse para incluílas na caixa Listas. O intervalo predefinido é o seleccionado nese momento na folla de cálculo.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_ADD 27 Engade unha nova lista á caixa Listas.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ALB_LISTS 46 Mostra as listas dispoñíbeis, que poden seleccionarse para editalas.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 3f Permite copiar as celas xa marcadas nunha lista de ordenación.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 5c Seleccione a opción Columnas para resumir nunha lista o contido das columnas seleccionadas.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 56 Seleccione a opción Filas para resumir nunha lista o contido das filas seleccionadas.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_ITERATE b5 Especifica se as fórmulas con referencias iterativas (fórmulas que se repiten continuamente ata que o problema se resolve) se calculan tras un número específico de repeticións.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CALC 145 Especifica se os cálculos deben realizarse cos valores arredondados que aparecen na folla de cálculo. As gráficas mostraranse cos valores visualizados. Se a opción Cálculo segundo o visualizado non foi marcada, os números exhibidos arredóndanse. Porén, internamente se calculan partindo dos números non arredondados.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_MATCH 14b Especifica que os criterios de busca definidos para as funcións de base de datos de Calc deben aplicarse de forma exacta a toda a cela. Cando a caixa Os criterios de busca = e <> deben ser aplicados a celas enteiras está marcada,  $[officename]  Calc compórtase igual que MS Excel ao buscar celas nas funcións de base de datos.
2d sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_PREC b2 Define o número de decimais con que se mostrarán os números con formato numérico estándar . Os números móstranse como números arredondados, mais non se gardan como tales.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_LOOKUP ec Especifica que se pode utilizar o texto de calquera cela como etiqueta para a columna situada debaixo do texto ou para a fila situada á dereita do texto. O texto debe conter unha palabra como mínimo e non pode conter ningún operador.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_REGEX 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESTD 21 Define 30/12/1899 como día cero.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CASE 74 Especifica se o aplicativo debe distinguir entre maiúsculas e minúsculas no texto, ao comparar o contido de celas.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESC10 83 Define 1/1/1900 como día cero. Utilice esta configuración coas follas de cálculo de StarCalc 1.0 que conteñan entradas de data.
12 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CALC 32 Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATE1904 72 Define 1/1/1904 como día cero. Utilice esta configuración coas follas de cálculo importadas en formato externo.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_GENERAL_PREC dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
2e sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_STEPS 30 Define o número máximo de pasos de iteración.
24 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_EPS 9a Especifica a diferenza entre o resultado de dous pasos consecutivos dunha iteración. Se é inferior ao valor de modificación mínimo, a iteración para.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE 6a A caixa de diálogo Cambios especifica varias opcións para realzar os cambios rexistrados nos documentos.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_REMOVE 4d Especifica a cor usada para realzar as eliminacións realizadas no documento.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_MOVE 3f Especifica a cor usada para realzar o contido de celas movidas.
31 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_CONTENT 4e Especifica a cor usada para realzar os cambios realizados no contido de celas.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_INSERT 4b Especifica a cor usada para realzar as insercións realizadas no documento.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SKIPEMPTYPAGES 64 Especifica que non se imprimen as páxinas baleiras sen contido nas celas ou sen obxectos de debuxo.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SELECTEDSHEETS 107 Especifica que só se imprime o contido das follas seleccionadas, mesmo cando se escolle un intervalo maior na caixa de diálogo Ficheiro - Imprimir ou na caixa de diálogo Formato - Intervalos de impresión. O contido das follas non seleccionadas non se imprime.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_RULER 5b Especifica se as regras deben mostrarse na parte superior ou inferior da área de traballo.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_MOVE_OUTLINE 42 %PRODUCTNAME mostra a liña de contorno de cada obxecto ao movelo.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_VIEW 26 Specifies the available display modes.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HANDLES_BEZIER 104 Mostra os puntos de control de todos os puntos de Bézier se previamente seleccionou unha curva de Bézier. Se a opción Todos os puntos de control do editor Bézier non está marcada, só se visualizan os puntos de control dos puntos de Bézier seleccionados.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3c Especifica se as guías deben mostrarse ao mover un obxecto.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HELPLINES 3c Especifica se as guías deben mostrarse ao mover un obxecto.
1a SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_CONTENTS 26 Specifies the available display modes.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_BORDER 61 Especifica se o contorno dun obxecto gráfico debe aliñarse coa marxe de páxina máis próxima.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_BIGORTHO 167 Créase un cadrado, partindo do lado máis longo dun rectángulo, se a tecla Maiús é premida antes de soltar o botón do rato. Tamén é aplicábel a unha elipse (créase un círculo baseado no diámetro máis longo da elipse). Se a caixa Estender bordos non está seleccionada, créase un cadrado ou un círculo baseado no lado ou no diámetro máis curto.
34 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 59 Axusta o bordo dun obxecto arrastrado á liña de axuste máis próxima ao soltar o rato.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 61 Especifica se o contorno dun obxecto gráfico debe aliñarse coa marxe de páxina máis próxima.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_SNAP_AREA cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ROTATE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_POINTS 61 Especifica se o contorno do obxecto debe aliñarse aos puntos do obxecto gráfico máis próximo.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_BEZ_ANGLE 31 Define o ángulo utilizado na redución de punto.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_FRAME 5f Especifica se o contorno do obxecto debe aliñarse ao bordo do obxecto gráfico máis próximo.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_HELPLINES 59 Axusta o bordo dun obxecto arrastrado á liña de axuste máis próxima ao soltar o rato.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 5f Especifica se o contorno do obxecto debe aliñarse ao bordo do obxecto gráfico máis próximo.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 61 Especifica se o contorno do obxecto debe aliñarse aos puntos do obxecto gráfico máis próximo.
2d svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ORTHO 76 Especifica que os obxectos gráficos se restrinxen vertical, horizontal ou diagonalmente (45°) ao crealos ou movelos.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3d Define a configuración da grade para crear e mover obxectos.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_COLOR 33 Especifica que desexa imprimir nas cores orixinais.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_FRONT 35 Seleccione Fronte para imprimir a fronte dun folleto.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_GRAYSCALE 3e Especifica que desexa imprimir as cores como escala de grises.
33 SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_HIDDEN_PAGES 44 Especifica se deben imprimirse as páxinas ocultas na presentación.
2f SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAGENAME 3e Especifica se debe imprimirse o nome da páxina dun documento.
17 SD_HID_SD_PRINT_OPTIONS 5a Especifica a configuración de impresión dentro dun documento de debuxo ou presentación.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGETILE a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_DEFAULT 46 Especifica que non desexa modificar a escala das páxinas ao imprimir.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BOOKLET 4b Seleccione a opción Folleto para imprimir o documento en forma de folleto.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_DATE 2c Especifica se debe imprimirse a data actual.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGESIZE 83 Especifica se os obxectos situados alén das marxes de impresión actual deben escalarse para que se axusten ao papel da impresora.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_TIME 2c Especifica se debe imprimirse a hora actual.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAPERBIN 55 Determina que debe usarse a bandexa de papel definida na configuración da impresora.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BLACKWHITE 3d Especifica que desexa imprimir o documento en branco e negro.
2b sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_BACK 37 Seleccione Reverso para imprimir o reverso dun folleto.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST 6f Especifica que $[officename] Impress calcule o espazamento do parágrafo exactamente como Microsoft PowerPoint.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_QUICKEDIT 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_CROOK_NO_CONTORTION 66 Mantén un aliñamento relativo entre os puntos de Bézier e os obxectos 2D ao distorsionar o obxecto.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MASTERPAGE_CACHE 4e Especifica se a caché debe usarse para mostrar obxectos na páxina principal.
34 sd%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3AMTR_FLD_TABSTOP 2b Define o espazamento entre as tabulacións.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_TEMPLATE 6a Especifica se o asistente deber activarse ao abrir unha presentación con Ficheiro - Novo - Presentación.
31 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_PICKTHROUGH 46 Especifica se debe seleccionarse un marco de texto ao premer no texto.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 46 Especifica se debe seleccionarse un marco de texto ao premer no texto.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_ACTUAL_PAGE 4a Especifica que a presentación debe comezar sempre coa dispositiva actual.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MARKED_HIT_MOVES_ALWAYS bd Especifica que desexa mover un obxecto coa ferramenta Rotar activada. Se a opción Obxectos sempre desprazábeis non está marcada, a ferramenta Rotar só pode usarse para rotar un obxecto.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_COPY 69 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key (Mac: Command key).
2a sd%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_SCALE 28 Determina a escala do debuxo nas regras.
2a sd%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ALB_METRIC 32 Determina a unidade de medida para presentacións.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_MISC 45 Define as opcións xerais para documentos de debuxo ou presentación.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions cb Define a configuración global para documentos de debuxo, incluíndo o contido que se debe mostrar, a escala que se debe usar, o aliñamento de grade e o contido que se vai imprimir de forma predefinida.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
3d starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_IGNORE_SPACING 60 Especifica que estes comodíns de espazo deben eliminarse cando se encontran na fin dunha liña.
16 SFX2_HID_PRINT_OPTIONS 46 Define a configuración de fórmulas válida para todos os documentos.
36 starmath%3AMetricField%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3AMF_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_TITLEROW 40 Especifica se desexa incluír o nome do documento na impresión.
28 starmath%3ATabPage%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE 46 Define a configuración de fórmulas válida para todos os documentos.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
36 starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
3f starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ORIGINAL_SIZE 41 Imprime a fórmula sen axustar o tamaño de tipo de letra actual,
3c starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_EQUATION_TEXT 59 Especifica se se debe incluír o contido da xanela Ordes na parte inferior da impresión.
2e STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_FRAME 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3d starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_FIT_TO_PAGE 40 Axusta a fórmula ao formato de páxina utilizado na impresión.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3ALB_CHART_COLOR_LIST 34 Mostra as cores dispoñíbeis para a serie de datos.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3APB_RESET_TO_DEFAULT 41 Restaura a configuración de cor definida ao instalar o programa.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_CODE db Carga e garda co documento o código Basic dun documento Microsoft como módulo especial de $[officename] Basic. O código desactivado de Microsoft Basic está visíbel no IDE de $[officename] Basic entre Sub e End Sub.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_CODE db Carga e garda co documento o código Basic dun documento Microsoft como módulo especial de $[officename] Basic. O código desactivado de Microsoft Basic está visíbel no IDE de $[officename] Basic entre Sub e End Sub.
3a svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_EXECTBL bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_CODE db Carga e garda co documento o código Basic dun documento Microsoft como módulo especial de $[officename] Basic. O código desactivado de Microsoft Basic está visíbel no IDE de $[officename] Basic entre Sub e End Sub.
1b CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_MSFLTR2_CLB ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
2f cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_WEST_LANG 63 Especifica o idioma utilizado para efectuar a verificación ortográfica con alfabetos occidentais.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_DECIMALSEPARATOR 7f Especifica o uso da tecla separadora de decimal definida no seu sistema ao premer na correspondente tecla do teclado numérico.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_ASIAN_LANG 62 Especifica o idioma utilizado para efectuar a verificación ortográfica con alfabetos asiáticos.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_LOCALESETTING 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_ASIANSUPPORT 83 Activa o soporte para idiomas asiáticos. Agora pode modificar a configuración do idioma asiático correspondente en %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_COMPLEX_LANG 5f Especifica o idioma para a verificación ortográfica en idiomas con deseño de texto complexo.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_USERINTERFACE c3 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CURRENT_DOC 5f Especifica que a configuración de idiomas predefinidos só é válida para o documento actual.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CTLSUPPORT a1 Activa o soporte para idiomas con deseño de texto complexo. Agora pode modificar a configuración correspondente para deseño de texto complexo en %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_CURRENCY 5c Especifica a moeda que se usará para predefinir o formato monetario e os campos monetarios.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 4c Especifica o idioma para o cal desexa definir os caracteres de inicio e fin.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_NO_COMP 24 Especifica que non haxa compresión.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_PUNCT 62 Especifica que o entreletrado se aplica tanto en textos occidentais como á puntuación asiática.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ACB_STANDARD 77 Ao marcar Predefinido, as seguintes dúas caixas de texto énchense cos caracteres predefinidos do idioma seleccionado:
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_KANA_COMP 3c Especifica que a puntuación e o kana xaponés se comprimen.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_START 48 Especifica os caracteres que non deben aparecer sós no inicio de liña.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_COMP 2d Especifica que se comprima só a puntuación.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_KERNING 42 Especifica que o entreletrado só se aplica en textos occidentais.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_END 45 Especifica os caracteres que non deben aparecer sós na fin da liña.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_WHITESPACES 2d Especifica os caracteres que deben ignorarse.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_MIDDLE_DOT 2d Especifica os caracteres que deben ignorarse.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_IAIYA 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_TSITHICHI_DHIZI 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_DIZI_DUZU 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
45 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HYUFYU_BYUVYU 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_VARIANT_FORM_KANJI 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_PUNCTUATION 2d Especifica os caracteres que deben ignorarse.
4b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_PROLONGED_SOUNDMARK 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
46 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_OLD_KANA_FORMS 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HIRAGANA_KATAKANA 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_KIKU 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_BAVA_HAFA 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CONTRACTIONS 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_SESHE_ZEJE 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_REPEAT_CHAR_MARKS 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_MINUS_DASH_CHOON 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 42 Especifica as opcións que deben tratarse como iguais nunha busca.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ACB_SEQUENCECHECKING 4e Activa a verificación da secuencia de entrada para idiomas como o tailandés.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_VISUAL 9b Premendo a frecha cara á dereita móvese o cursor do texto cara á dereita. Premendo a frecha cara á esquerda móvese o cursor do texto cara á esquerda.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_LOGICAL b8 Premendo na frecha cara á dereita móvese o cursor do texto cara ao final do texto actual. Premendo a frecha cara á esquerda móvese o cursor do texto cara ao comezo do texto actual.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ALB_NUMERALS d1 Selecciona o tipo de numerais utilizados no texto, nos textos incorporados a obxectos, nos campos e nos controis en todos os módulos de %PRODUCTNAME. Isto non afecta ao contido das celas de %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_DRIVERPOOLING 8d Seleccione un controlador da lista e marque a caixa de verificación Activar agrupamento para este controlador para agrupar a súa conexión.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_POOL_CONNS 37 Especifica se deben agruparse as conexións escollidas.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 37 Especifica se deben agruparse as conexións escollidas.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ANF_TIMEOUT 50 Define o tempo en segundos que se debe esperar ata que se libera unha conexión.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_EDIT 56 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ligazón de base de datos para editar a entrada seleccionada.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_DELETE 28 Elimina da lista a entrada seleccionada.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_NEW 50 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ligazón de base de datos para crear unha nova entrada.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 81 Lista o ficheiro de base de datos e o nome rexistrado das bases de datos rexistradas. Prema dúas veces para editar unha entrada.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 5b Abre unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros onde pode seleccionar o ficheiro de base de datos.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 5d Insira un nome para a base de datos. %PRODUCTNAME usa ese nome para acceder á base de datos.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_PARAMETER 37 Abre a caixa de diálogo Parámetros de inicio de Java.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_ADD 3a Engada un camiño ao cartafol raíz dun JRE no computador.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_CLASSPATH 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Camiño de clase.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_LIST b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3ACB_JAVA_ENABLE 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDPATH 36 Seleccione un cartafol e engádao ao camiño de clase.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3ALB_PATH 42 Especifica a localización de clases e bibliotecas de clases Java.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_REMOVE_PATH 6c Seleccione un ficheiro ou cartafol na lista e prema en Eliminar para eliminar o obxecto do camiño de clase.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDARCHIVE 55 Seleccione un ficheiro de datos en formato jar ou zip e engádao ao camiño de clase.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_REMOVE 33 Elimina o parámetro de inicio de JRE seleccionado.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_ASSIGN 35 Engade o parámetro de inicio de JRE actual á lista.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3AED_PARAMETER bd Introduza un parámetro de inicio para un JRE da mesma forma que o faría nunha liña de ordes. Prema en Atribuír para engadir o parámetro á lista de parámetros de inicio dispoñíbeis.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3ALB_ASSIGNED 7b Lista os parámetros de inicio de JRE atribuídos. Para eliminar un parámetro de inicio, seleccióneo e prema en Eliminar.
3a xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_LOW db A macro pode configurarse para un comezo automático e, pode realizar accións potencialmente daniñas como eliminar ou renomear ficheiros. Non é recomendábel esta configuración ao abrir documentos de outros autores.
3d xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_MEDIUM 134 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. Poden executarse as macros procedentes de fontes fiábeis. Alén diso, pódese executar calquera macro que proceda dunha localización de ficheiro fiábel. Con todas as demais macros é preciso fornecer unha confirmación.
3f xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_VERYHIGH 92 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. As macros desas localizacións teñen permiso de execución.
3b xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_HIGH 101 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. Só as macros asinadas das fontes fiábeis teñen permiso de execución. Alén diso, todas as macros das localizacións fiábeis de ficheiros teñen permiso de execución.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_REMOVE_TRUSTCERT 45 Elimina o certificado seleccionado da lista de certificados fiábeis.
48 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_VIEW_TRUSTCERT 49 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ver certificado para o certificado seleccionado.
4d xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_REMOVE_TRUSTFILELOC 51 Elimina o cartafol seleccionado da lista de localizacións fiábeis de ficheiros.
43 xmlsecurity%3AListBox%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3ALB_TRUSTFILELOC 5f Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_ADD_TRUSTFILELOC 7f Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de cartafoles. Seleccione un cartafol desde o que se poidan executar todas as macros.
28 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_TRUSTSOURCES 1f Lista os certificados fiábeis.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ANF_PORT 17 Introduza o porto SMTP.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_AUTHENTICATION a4 Abre a caixa de diálogo Autenticación de servidor, onde vostede pode especificar a configuración de autenticación do servidor para o correo electrónico seguro.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ACB_REPLYTO 85 Usa o enderezo de correo electrónico que introduciu na caixa de texto Enderezo de resposta como o enderezo ao que se debe responder.
23 SW_CHECKBOX_TP_MAILCONFIG_CB_SECURE 5a Cando está dispoñíbel, utiliza unha conexión segura para enviar correos electrónicos.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_TEST 5c Abre a caixa de diálogo Probar configuración da conta para probar a configuración actual.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_ADDRESS 42 Introduza o seu enderezo de correo electrónico para as respostas.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_DISPLAYNAME 15 Introduza o seu nome.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_SERVER 22 Introduza o nome do servidor SMTP.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_REPLYTO 46 Insira o enderezo que desexa usar para o envio de e-mails de resposta.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYMONTH 29 A verificación efectuarase mensualmente.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTOCHECK 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHECKNOW 22 A verificación efectuarase agora.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYDAY 27 A verificación efectúase diariamente.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYWEEK 48 A verificación efectuarase semanalmente. Esta é a opción predefinida.
33 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_SERVER 41 Introduza o nome do servidor de mensaxes de correo POP 3 ou IMAP.
46 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SEP_AUTHENTICATION 55 Seleccione esta opción se o servidor SMTP esixe un nome de usuario e un contrasinal.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_IMAP 38 Especifica que o servidor de entrada de correo usa IMAP.
39 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ANF_PORT 2b Introduza o porto no servidor POP3 ou IMAP.
3f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ACB_AUTHENTICATION 4d Activa a autenticación necesaria para enviar correos electrónicos por SMTP.
35 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_USERNAME 31 Introduza o nome de usuario para o servidor SMTP.
38 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_OUTPASSWORD 2f Introduza o contrasinal para o nome de usuario.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_POP3 39 Especifica que o servidor de entrada de correo usa POP 3.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INUSERNAME 31 Introduza o nome de usuario para o servidor IMAP.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INPASSWORD 18 Introduza o contrasinal.
40 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SMPTAFTERPOP 54 Seleccione se para enviar correos electrónicos é necesario ler antes os recibidos.
3a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3AED_ERROR 6b Na caixa de lista Erros pode ler unha explicación dos erros encontrados durante a proba da configuración.
21 SW_HID_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS_TLB 43 Na caixa de lista superior verá os resultados da sesión de proba.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3APB_STOP 49 Prema no botón Parar para interromper manualmente unha sesión de proba.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 52 Use a caixa lista de valores para visualizar os valores e copialos no portapapeis.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 65 A páxina Xeral da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información básica sobre o certificado.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_ROW 23 Insire unha fila debaixo da actual.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_COL 30 Alterna a fila actual coa adxacente por debaixo.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_TEXT_COL 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_COL 49 Elimina a columna actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a columna da etiqueta.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 29 Introducir nomes para as series de datos.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 4f Abre a caixa de diálogo Táboa de datos onde pode editar os datos da gráfica.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_ROW 30 Alterna a fila actual coa adxacente por debaixo.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_ROW 43 Elimina a fila actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a fila da etiqueta.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_COL 26 Insire unha columna despois da actual.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle 6d Prema en Activar/Desativar título do eixo na barra Formatado para mostrar ou ocultar as etiquetas dos eixos.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle 68 Prema en Activar/Desactivar título na barra Formatado para mostrar ou ocultar o título e o subtítulo.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 38 Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2d Coloca a lenda na parte esquerda da gráfica.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 89 Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Coloca a lenda na parte superior da gráfica.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_LEGEND_POS%3ALB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend 56 Para mostrar ou ocultar a lenda, prema en Activar/Desactivar lenda na barra Formatado.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 2d Coloca a lenda na parte inferior da gráfica.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2c Coloca a lenda na parte dereita da gráfica.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PERCENT 38 Mostra a porcentaxe dos puntos de datos en cada columna.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_KNOB 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_NUMBER 30 Mostra os valores absolutos dos puntos de datos.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_VALUE 30 Mostra os valores absolutos dos puntos de datos.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_EDIT 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SYMBOL 42 Mostra as iconas de lenda xunto a cada etiqueta de punto de datos.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_NUMBERFORMAT 2b Opens a dialog to select the number format.
1c CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 2f Opens a dialog to select the percentage format.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 47 Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_TEXT 2f Mostra as etiquetas de texto do punto de datos.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XAXIS 30 Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YAXIS 34 Mostra o eixo Y en forma de liña con subdivisións.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZAXIS 34 Mostra o eixo Z en forma de liña con subdivisións.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XAXIS 28 Mostra un eixo X secundario na gráfica.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YAXIS 28 Mostra un eixo Y secundario na gráfica.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SIGMA 52 Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance).
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CT_INDICATE 1e Specifies the error indicator.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_VALUE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_VARIANT 60 Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_CONSTERROR 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PLUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_VALUE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR_VALUE 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NO_ERROR 1d Does not show any error bars.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT_VALUE 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SAME_FOR_BOTH be Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION_LB 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_MINUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 40 Use the Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LOGARITHMIC 16 Definir a resolución.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_NONE 16 Definir a resolución.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LINEAR 16 Definir a resolución.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_EQUATION 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 4f Trend lines can be added to all 2D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_R_SQUARED 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_POWER 16 Definir a resolución.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_EXPONENTIAL 16 Definir a resolución.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 8c Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series.
31 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_2 9d Modifica a escala do eixo Y. Este eixo só é visíbel se ten polo menos unha serie de datos atribuída e se o modo de visualización do eixo está activado.
2a chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_GAP 37 Define, en porcentaxe, o espazamento entre as columnas.
2e chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_OVERLAP 40 Define a configuración necesaria para sobrepor series de datos.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STARTING_ANGLE_DIAL 151 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
32 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ACB_CLOCKWISE ab The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_CONNECTOR a3 Nas gráficas de columnas "amontoadas" e "porcentuais" (barra vertical), marque esta caixa de verificación para conectar as capas de columna asociadas ás liñas.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_1 6a Esta opción está activada como predefinida.Todas as series de datos están aliñadas no eixo Y primario.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
3b chart2%3ANumericField%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ANF_STARTING_ANGLE 70 Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_ZGRID 48 Engade liñas de grade que dividen o eixo Z en seccións máis pequenas.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal e4 A icona Activar/Desactivar grade horizontal da barra Formatación alterna a visualización da grade mostrando o eixo X. Nota: Só funciona se se limpan as caixas de verificación de Grade secundaria situadas en Inserir - Grades.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical dd A icona Activar/Desactivar Grade vertical da barra de ferramentas Formatación alterna a visualización da grade para o eixo Y. Nota: Só funciona se a grade secundariado eixo X non está seleccionada en Inserir - Grades.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YGRID 48 Engade liñas de grade que dividen o eixo Y en seccións máis pequenas.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XGRID 48 Agrega liñas de grade que dividen o eixo X en seccións máis pequenas.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryYTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AZTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AXTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryXTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
f .uno%3ASubTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
10 .uno%3AMainTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AYTitle 5e Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado ou as propiedades de todos os títulos xuntos.
10 .uno%3AAllTitles 5e Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado ou as propiedades de todos os títulos xuntos.
25 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_EQUATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_TITLE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTOVERLAP 40 Especifica que o texto das celas pode sobreporse a outras celas.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTBREAK 1d Permite unha quebra de texto.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_DOWNUP 4f Dispón os números nos eixos, cos números impares debaixo dos números pares.
3e chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_AUTOORDER 2c Dispón automaticamente os números no eixo.
32 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ALB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_STACKED 42 Atribúe unha orientación de texto vertical aos contidos da cela.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 7f A icona Activar/desactivar título do eixo da barra de ferramentas Formatado activa e desactiva a etiquetaxe de todos os eixos.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_UPDOWN 4d Dispón os números no eixo, cos números pares debaixo dos números impares.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_DEGREES 36 Permite inserir manualmente o ángulo de orientación.
2c CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_LABEL_LB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_SCHOW_DESCR 42 Especifica se as etiquetas dos eixos deben mostrarse ou ocultarse.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 53 A variábel de orientación de texto defínese ao premer en calquera lugar da roda.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_SIDEBYSIDE 33 Coloca os números no eixo, uns ao lado dos outros.
d .uno%3ALegend 41 Define os atributos de bordo, de área e de carácter das lendas.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB ab Abre unha caixa de diálogo na cal é posíbel editar as propiedades do  eixo Y secundario. Para inserir un eixo Y secundario, escolla Inserir - Eixos e seleccione Eixo Y.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA aa Abre unha caixa de diálogo na cal é posíbel editar as propiedades do eixo X secundario. Para inserir un eixo X secundario, escolla Inserir - Eixos e seleccione Eixo X.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 3c Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE_MayBeDateAxis 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3AValueAxis 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
24 CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_SCALE_EDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2d chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3ACategory 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
37 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_TIME_RESOLUTION 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2d chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 4d Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_HELP 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2a chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_MAIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
30 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_TIME_RESOLUTION 47 Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MAX 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2c chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
28 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_SCALE_CBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
33 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
2a chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_INNER 5b Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte interior do eixo.
35 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_OUTER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo.
39 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_OUTER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo.
42 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
36 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
2f CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
30 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
3c CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 CHART2_COMBOBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
4a chart2%3AComboBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_INNER 5b Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte interior do eixo.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_OUTER 5c Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo .
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_OUTER 5c Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo .
3f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYHelp 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZHelp 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYMain 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXHelp 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXMain 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZMain 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall b1 Abre a caixa de diálogo Paredes da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades o fondo da gráfica. Trátase do fondo "vertical" situado detrás da área de datos da gráfica.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor bb Abre a caixa de diálogo Base da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades da base da gráfica. É a parte inferior das gráficas 3D. Esta función só é válida para as gráficas 3D.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea ae Abre a caixa de diálogo Área da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades da área da gráfica. A área da gráfica é o fondo situado detrás dos elementos da gráfica.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_B 1b Aplicar un modelo spline B.
3e chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_ORDER 22 Set the degree of the polynomials.
43 chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_RESOLUTION 16 Definir a resolución.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_CUBIC 21 Aplicar un modelo spline cúbico.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixo y. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3a chart2%3ACheckbox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_ROUNDEDEDGE 24 Os bordos están arredondados ao 5%.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixo x. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
42 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 37 Seleccione unha cor utilizando a caixa de diálogo Cor.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 4c Prema para alternar entre o modelo de iluminación dunha esfera ou dun cubo.
3a chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_OBJECTLINES 4d Mostra bordos arredor das áreas configurando o estilo de liña como Sólido.
40 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3c chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 2b Seleccione unha cor para a luz de ambiente.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_SHADING 5c Aplica o sombreamento Gouraud se está marcado ou o sombreamento plano se non está marcado.
d .uno%3AView3D c6 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para editar as propiedades dunha vista tridimensional das gráficas de columnas, barras, pizza, e de área. Para gráficas de liña e XY (Dispersión) pode ver liñas 3D.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixo z. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
39 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ALB_SCHEME 60 Seleccione un esquema da caixa de lista ou prema calquera das seguintes caixas de verificación.
3f chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 101 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.
46 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 37 Seleccione unha cor utilizando a caixa de diálogo Cor.
3b chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_LIGHTSOURCE 35 Seleccione unha cor para a fonte de luz seleccionada.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_SHOW 1e Mostra unha lenda na gráfica.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 30 Posiciona a lenda na parte superior da gráfica.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_Y 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZGRID 6e Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo z. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para as gráficas tridimensionais.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Z 6e Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo z. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para as gráficas tridimensionais.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2a Posiciona a lenda á esquerda da gráfica.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Posiciona a lenda na parte inferior da gráfica.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_X 71 Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Y 32 Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo y (vertical).
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 29 Posiciona a lenda á dereita da gráfica.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_X 34 Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo x (horizontal).
19 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_MAIN 26 Introducir un título para a gráfica.
18 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SUB 29 Introducir un subtítulo para a gráfica.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Tipo de gráfica.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
2e chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_3D_SCHEME 22 Seleccione o tipo de aparencia 3D.
38 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y_PERCENT 36 As series amontoadas mostran valores como porcentaxes.
34 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_XVALUE_SORTING 73 Conecta puntos por valores X ascendentes, mesmo se a orde dos valores é diferente, nun diagrama de dispersión XY.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_SPLINES 21 As liñas móstranse como curvas.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_NUM_OF_LINES 49 Definir o número de liñas para o tipo de gráfica de Columnas e liñas.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_TYPE 27 Seleccione un tipo de gráfica básico.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LB_BAR_GEOMETRY 1f Selecciona unha forma da lista.
30 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y 3e As series amontoadas mostran os valores uns enriba dos outros.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_STACKED 31 Mostra series amontoadas para gráficas de liña.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_VARIANT 32 Seleccione un subtipo do tipo de gráfica básico.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_3D_LOOK 32 Activa unha aparencia 3D para os valores de datos.
35 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3APB_SPLINE_DIALOG 41 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para definir as propiedades da curva.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATACOLS 100 A serie de datos toma datos das columnas consecutivas no intervalo seleccionado. Para gráficas de dispersión, a primeira columna de datos conterá valores x para todas as seires. As demais columnas de datos utilízanse como valores y, un para cada serie.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AED_RANGE c5 Introduza o intervalo de datos que desexa incluír na gráfica. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo mentres selecciona o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATAROWS f7 A serie de datos toma datos das filas consecutivas no intervalo seleccionado. Para gráficas de dispersión, a primeira serie de datos conterá valores x en todas as series. As demais series de datos utilízanse como valores y, un para cada serie.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 14c Para series de datos en columnas: A primeira fila do intervalo utilízase como nomes para series de datos. Para series de datos en filas: A primeira fila no intervalo utilízase como categorías. As filas restantes abranguen a serie de datos. Se esta caixa de verificación non está seleccionada, todas as filas son serie de datos.
3e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 151 Para series de datos en columnas: A primeira columna do intervalo utilízase como nomes para series de datos. Para serie de datos en filas: A primeira columna utilízase como categorías. As columnas restantes abranguen as columnas de datos. Se esta caixa de verificación non está seleccionada, todas as columnas son columnas de datos.
31 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AIB_RANGE c5 Introduza o intervalo de datos que desexa incluír na gráfica. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo mentres selecciona o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 5b Abre a caixa de diálogo Intervalos de datos onde pode editar Intervalos e Series de datos.
35 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_CAT 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_CATEGORIES 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_RANGE 123 Mostra o intervalo de orixe desde a segunda columna da caixa de lista Intervalo de datos. Pode modificar o intervalo na caixa de texto ou arrastrar no documento. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo ao seleccionar o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
2e chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_ADD 9d Engade unha entrada debaixo da seleccionada na lista Serie de datos. Se hai unha entrada seleccionada, a nova serie de datos obtén o mesmo tipo de gráfica.
2f chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_DOWN 42 Move cara a abaixo a entrada seleccionada na lista Serie de datos.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_RANGES_LIST c4 Mostra todos os intervalos de datos utilizados pola serie de datos seleccionada na caixa de lista Serie de datos. Cada intervalo de datos mostra o nome do papel e o enderezo do intervalo de orixe.
31 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_REMOVE 37 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista Serie de datos.
36 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_MAIN 123 Mostra o intervalo de orixe desde a segunda columna da caixa de lista Intervalo de datos. Pode modificar o intervalo na caixa de texto ou arrastrar no documento. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo ao seleccionar o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
2d chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_UP 42 Move cara a arriba a entrada seleccionada na lista Serie de datos.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_SERIES_LIST ce Mostra unha lista de todas as series de datos na gráfica. Prema nunha entrada para ver e editar esas series de datos. Prema en Engadir para inserir na lista unha nova serie despois da entrada seleccionada.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 2e Modifica a disposición dos datos da gráfica.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 2e Modifica a disposición dos datos da gráfica.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 38 Redimensiona o texto ao modificar o tamaño da gráfica.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement c3 Move todos os elementos para a súa posición predefinida dentro da gráfica actual. Esta función non altera o tipo de gráfica nin ningún dos outros atributos alén da posición dos elementos.
12 .uno%3AContextType 29 Mostra o nome do tipo de gráfica actual.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 3c Restabelece todos os puntos de datos ao formato predefinido.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Borra o eixo seleccionado.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 19 Formata a serie de datos.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 1c Formata as barras de erro Y.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1c Formata o eixo seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1f Formata o título seleccionado.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 1d Insire unha grade secundaria.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 21 Formata a ecuación de tendencia.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 26 Abre un diálogo para inserir un eixo.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 1d Formata a planta da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 30 Formata os indicadores de perda de cotizacións.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 1d Formata a liña de tendencia.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1f Formata a liña de valor medio.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 32 Insire valor de coeficiente de determinación R².
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 26 Formata o punto de datos seleccionado.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 1b Formata a grade secundaria.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 41 Restabelece o punto de datos seleccionado ao formato predefinido.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1f Elimina a liña de valor medio.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 18 Borra a grade principal.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 1c Formata a lenda da gráfica.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 14 Borra a grade menor.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 31 Abre un diálogo para inserir un título de eixo.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 1c Formata a área da gráfica.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 1c Insire unha grade principal.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 30 Abre un diálogo para inserir ou eliminar eixos.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 22 Borra todas as etiquetas de datos.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 1a Borra a lenda da gráfica.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 1a Insire etiquetas de datos.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 33 Abre un diálogo para inserir títulos de gráfica.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 1d Formata a parede da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 33 Formata os indicadores de ganancia de cotizacións.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 29 Formata a etiqueta de datos seleccionada.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 27 Elimina a etiqueta de datos selecciona.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 2a Elimina a ecuación de liña de tendencia.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 14 Elimina o valor R².
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 1e Formata as etiquetas de datos.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 1c Elimina as barras de erro Y.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 22 Insire unha soa etiqueta de datos.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 52 Insire unha ecuación de liña de tendencia e o coeficiente de determinación R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 1a Formata a grade principal.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector dd Seleccionar o elemento da gráfica que quere formatar. O elemento queda seleccionado na previsualización da gráfica. Prema sobre Formatado de selección para abrir o diálogo de propiedades para o elemento seleccionado.